P. 1
Openbravo ER Diagram 1 0

Openbravo ER Diagram 1 0

|Views: 130|Likes:
Published by Julia Mar

More info:

Published by: Julia Mar on Aug 02, 2011
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

08/02/2011

pdf

text

original

Sections

  • 1 Window, Tab and Field
  • 1.1 AD Window
  • 1.2 AD Tab
  • 1.3 AD Image
  • 1.4 AD AuxiliarInput
  • 1.5 AD FieldGroup
  • 1.6 AD Field
  • 2 Table and column and attachments
  • 2.1 AD Table
  • 2.2 AD Column
  • 2.3 AD Callout
  • 2.4 AD Val Rule
  • 2.5 AD Element
  • 2.6 C File
  • 2.7 AD DataType
  • 3 Reference
  • 3.1 AD Reference
  • 3.2 AD Ref List
  • 3.3 AD Ref Table
  • 3.4 AD Ref Search
  • 3.5 AD Ref Search Column
  • 4 Menu
  • 4.1 AD Menu
  • 5 Process, Form and Task
  • 5.1 AD Process
  • 5.2 AD Process Para
  • 5.3 AD Form
  • 5.4 AD Task
  • 6 Workflow
  • 6.1 AD Workflow
  • 6.2 AD WF Node
  • 6.3 AD WF Node Trl
  • 6.4 AD WF NodeNext
  • 7 Tree
  • 7.1 AD TreeNodePR
  • 7.2 AD TreeNodeBP
  • 7.3 AD TreeNode
  • 7.4 AD TreeBar
  • 7.5 AD Tree
  • 7.6 AD TreeNodeMM
  • 8 Internals: process execution, sequences, messages, log
  • 8.1 AD PInstance
  • 8.2 AD PInstance Para
  • 8.3 AD PInstance Log
  • 8.4 AD Note
  • 8.5 AD Sequence
  • 8.6 AD Message
  • 8.7 AD TextInterfaces
  • 8.8 AD Dimension
  • 8.9 AD Month
  • 9 Model objects mapping
  • 9.1 AD Model Object
  • 9.2 AD Model Object Mapping
  • • AD Model Object Mapping ID:
  • 10 Translations
  • 10.1 AD Language
  • 10.2 AD Window Trl
  • 10.3 AD Process Trl
  • 10.4 AD Tab Trl
  • 10.5 AD Element Trl
  • 10.6 AD FieldGroup Trl
  • 10.7 AD Reference Trl
  • 10.8 AD Process Para Trl
  • 10.9 AD Menu Trl
  • 10.10 AD Message Trl
  • 10.11 AD Field Trl
  • 10.12 AD TextInterfaces Trl
  • 10.13 AD Task Trl
  • 10.14 AD Workflow Trl
  • 10.15 AD Form Trl
  • 10.16 AD Ref List Trl
  • 10.17 AD WF Node Trl
  • 11 Access
  • 11.1 AD User
  • 11.2 AD User Roles
  • 11.3 AD Role
  • 11.4 AD Task Access
  • 11.5 AD Window Access
  • 11.6 AD Process Access
  • 11.7 AD Workflow Access
  • 11.8 AD Form Access
  • 11.9 AD Role OrgAccess
  • 11.10 AD Table Access
  • 12 Country, Region and Location
  • 12.1 C Country
  • 12.2 C Country Trl
  • 12.3 C Region
  • 12.4 C Location
  • 13 System, Client, Org and Session info. Preferences
  • 13.1 AD System
  • 13.2 AD Client
  • 13.3 AD ClientInfo
  • 13.4 AD Org
  • 13.5 AD OrgInfo
  • 13.6 AD Session
  • 13.7 AD Preference
  • 14 Warehouse, Shipper and Freigth
  • 14.1 M Warehouse
  • 14.2 M Locator
  • 14.3 M Warehouse Shipper
  • 14.4 M Freight
  • 14.5 M FreightCategory
  • 14.6 M Shipper
  • 15 Business partner
  • 15.1 C Greeting
  • 15.2 C Greeting Trl
  • 15.3 C BPartner
  • 15.4 C BPartner Location
  • 15.5 C SalesRegion
  • 15.6 C BP Group
  • 15.7 C BP TaxCategory
  • 15.8 C BP BankAccount
  • 15.9 AD User
  • 15.10 R InterestArea
  • 15.11 R ContactInterest
  • 16 Payment term
  • 16.1 C PaymentTerm
  • 16.2 C Paymenttermline
  • 16.3 C PaymentTerm Trl
  • 17 Product
  • 17.1 M Product
  • 17.2 M Product Category
  • 17.3 M Substitute
  • 17.4 M Product BOM
  • 17.5 M Product Customer
  • 17.6 M Product Org
  • 17.7 M Product PO
  • 17.8 M Replenish
  • 17.9 M Product Template
  • 17.10 M Product UOM
  • 17.11 M Costing
  • 17.12 M Product Trl
  • 18 Unit of Measure
  • 18.1 C UOM
  • 18.2 C UOM Conversion
  • 18.3 C UOM Trl
  • 19 Attribute
  • 19.1 M Attribute
  • 19.2 M AttributeSet
  • 19.3 M AttributeValue
  • 19.4 M AttributeUse
  • 19.5 M AttributeSetInstance
  • 19.6 M AttributeInstance
  • 20 Pricing
  • 20.1 M PriceList
  • 20.2 M PriceList Version
  • 20.3 M ProductPrice
  • 20.4 M DiscountSchema
  • 20.5 M DiscountSchemaLine
  • 20.6 M Offer
  • 20.7 M Offer PriceList
  • 20.8 M Offer BPartner
  • 20.9 M Offer BP Group
  • 20.10 M Offer Prod Cat
  • 20.11 M Offer Product
  • 20.12 C Discount
  • 20.13 C BPartner Discount
  • 21 Tax
  • 21.1 C TaxCategory
  • 21.2 C TaxCategory Trl
  • 21.3 C Tax
  • 21.4 C Tax Trl
  • 21.5 C Tax Zone
  • 22 Currency
  • 22.1 C Currency
  • 22.2 C Currency Trl
  • 22.3 C Conversion Rate
  • 23 Document type
  • 23.1 C DocType
  • 23.2 C DocType Trl
  • 24 Activity, Campaign and Channel
  • 24.1 C Activity
  • 24.2 C Campaign
  • 24.3 C Channel
  • 25 Order
  • 25.1 C Incoterms
  • 25.2 C Order
  • 25.3 C OrderLine
  • 25.4 C OrderLine Offer
  • 25.5 C OrderTax
  • 26 Purchase specific
  • 26.1 M Requisition
  • 26.2 M RequisitionLine
  • 26.3 M MatchInv
  • 26.4 M MatchPO
  • 27 Transaction
  • 27.1 M InOut
  • 27.2 M InOutLine
  • 27.3 M Movement
  • 27.4 M MovementLine
  • 27.5 M Inventory
  • 27.6 M InventoryLine
  • 27.7 M Internal Consumption
  • 27.8 M Internal ConsumptionLine
  • 27.9 M Production
  • 27.10 M ProductionPlan
  • 27.11 M ProductionLine
  • 27.12 M Transaction
  • 27.13 M Storage Detail
  • 27.14 M Storage Pending
  • 28 Invoice
  • 28.1 C Invoice
  • 28.2 C Invoice Discount
  • 28.3 C InvoiceLine
  • 28.4 C InvoiceLine Offer
  • 28.5 C InvoiceLine AcctDimension
  • • C Invoiceline Acctdimension ID:
  • 28.6 C InvoiceTax
  • 29 Commission
  • 29.1 C Commission
  • 29.2 C CommissionLine
  • 29.3 C CommissionRun
  • 29.4 C CommissionAmt
  • 29.5 C CommissionDetail
  • 30 Rappel
  • 30.1 M Rappel
  • 30.2 M Rappel Bpartner
  • 30.3 M Rappel Product
  • 30.4 M Rappel Productcategory
  • 30.5 M Rappel Scale
  • 30.6 M Rappel Invoice
  • 31 Project
  • 31.1 C ProjectType
  • 31.2 C Phase
  • 31.3 C Task
  • 31.4 C Project
  • 31.5 C ProjectPhase
  • 31.6 C ProjectTask
  • 31.7 C ProjectLine
  • 31.8 C Project Vendor
  • 31.9 C ProjectProposal
  • 31.10 C ProjectProposalLine
  • 31.11 C ProjectProposalTask
  • 32 Services
  • 32.1 S ExpenseType
  • 32.2 S TimeType
  • 32.3 S TimeExpense
  • 32.4 S TimeExpenseLine
  • 33 Payment management
  • 33.1 C Settlement
  • 33.2 C Debt Payment
  • 33.3 C Glitem
  • 33.4 C Debt Payment Balancing
  • 33.5 C Debt Payment Bal Replace
  • • C Debt Payment Bal Replace ID:
  • 33.6 C DP Management
  • 33.7 C DP ManagementLine
  • 33.8 C Remittance Parameter
  • 33.9 C Remittance Type
  • 33.10 C Remittance
  • 33.11 C RemittanceLine
  • 34 Bank and Cash management
  • 34.1 C Bank
  • 34.2 C BankAccount
  • 34.3 C PromissoryFormat
  • 34.4 C BankStatement
  • 34.5 C BankStatementLine
  • 34.6 C Cash
  • 34.7 C CashBook
  • 34.8 C CashLine
  • 34.9 C Charge
  • 35 Calendar, Year and Period
  • 35.1 C Calendar
  • 35.2 C Year
  • 35.3 C Period
  • 35.4 C PeriodControl
  • 35.5 C NonBusinessDay
  • 36 Accounting Schema
  • 36.1 C AcctSchema
  • 36.2 C AcctSchema Element
  • 36.3 C AcctSchema Table
  • 36.4 C AcctSchema GL
  • 36.5 C AcctSchema Default
  • 36.6 AD AccountingRpt Element
  • 37 Account Element
  • 37.1 C Element
  • 37.2 C ElementValue
  • 37.3 C ElementValue Operand
  • 37.4 C ElementValue Trl
  • 37.5 C ValidCombination
  • 38 Accounting
  • 38.1 C BP Group Acct
  • 38.2 C BP Customer Acct
  • 38.3 C BP Vendor Acct
  • 38.4 C BP Employee Acct
  • 38.5 M Product Category Acct
  • 38.6 M Product Acct
  • 38.7 C Tax Acct
  • 38.8 C BankAccount Acct
  • 38.9 C CashBook Acct
  • 38.10 A Asset Group Acct
  • 38.11 A Asset Acct
  • 38.12 C Charge Acct
  • 38.13 C Project Acct
  • 38.14 C Glitem Acct
  • 38.15 M Warehouse Acct
  • 38.16 C AcctSchema Default
  • 39 General Ledger and Budget
  • 39.1 GL Category
  • 39.2 GL JournalBatch
  • 39.3 GL Journal
  • 39.4 GL JournalLine
  • 39.5 C Budget
  • 39.6 C BudgetLine
  • 40 Assets
  • 40.1 A Asset
  • 40.2 A Asset Group
  • 40.3 A Amortization
  • 40.4 A Amortizationline
  • 41 Accounting Facts
  • 41.1 Fact Acct
  • 42 Manufacturing: Process Plan
  • 42.1 MA ProcessPlan
  • 42.2 MA ProcessPlan Version
  • 42.3 MA Sequence
  • 42.4 MA Sequence Employee
  • 42.5 MA Sequence IC
  • 42.6 MA Sequence Machine
  • 42.7 MA SequenceProduct
  • 43 Manufacturing: Work Requirement
  • 43.1 MA WorkRequirement
  • 43.2 MA WRPhase
  • 43.3 MA WRPhaseProduct
  • 44 Manufacturing: Work Effort
  • 44.1 MA PL Employee
  • 44.2 MA PL IC
  • 44.3 MA PL InvoiceLine
  • 44.4 MA PL Machine
  • 44.5 MA WEEmployee
  • 44.6 MA WEIncidence
  • 44.7 M Production
  • 44.8 M ProductionLine
  • 44.9 M ProductionPlan
  • 44.10 MA GlobalUse
  • 45 Manufacturing: Toolset
  • 45.1 MA Toolset
  • 45.2 MA ToolsetProcess
  • 45.3 MA Toolset Type
  • 45.4 MA ToolsetUsed
  • 46 Manufacturing: Periodic Control
  • 46.1 MA Periodic Control
  • 46.2 MA PC Value
  • 46.3 MA PC Test
  • 46.4 MA PC Case
  • 47 Manufacturing: Critical Control Points
  • 47.1 MA CCP
  • 47.2 MA CCP Group
  • 47.3 MA CCP Shift
  • 47.4 MA Measure Group
  • 47.5 MA Measure Shift
  • 47.6 MA Measure Time
  • 47.7 MA Measure Values
  • 48 Manufacturing: Maintenance
  • 48.1 MA Maintenance
  • 48.2 MA Maint Operation
  • 48.3 MA Maint Part
  • 48.4 MA Maint Periodicity
  • 48.5 MA Maint Scheduled
  • 48.6 MA Maint Worker
  • 49 Manufacturing: Machine
  • 49.1 MA Machine
  • 49.2 MA Machine Cost
  • 49.3 MA Machinestation
  • 49.4 MA Machine Type
  • 50 Manufacturing: Cost Center
  • 50.1 MA Costcenter IC
  • 50.2 MA CostCenter
  • 50.3 MA Costcenter Employee
  • 50.4 MA CostCenter Machine
  • 50.5 MA Costcenter Version
  • 51 Manufacturing: Indirect Cost
  • 51.1 MA Indirect Cost
  • 51.2 MA Indirect Cost Value
  • • MA Indirect Cost Value ID:
  • 52 Manufacturing: Incidence
  • 52.1 MA Incidence
  • 53 Manufacturing: Work Station
  • 53.1 MA Process
  • 53.2 MA Section
  • 53.3 MA Workstation
  • 54 Salary Category
  • 54.1 C Salary Category
  • 54.2 C Salary Category Cost
  • 54.3 C Salary Category
  • 54.4 C Salary Category Cost
  • 54.5 C Salary Category
  • 54.6 C Salary Category Cost
  • 54.7 C Salary Category
  • 54.8 C Salary Category Cost
  • 54.9 C Salary Category
  • 54.10 C Salary Category Cost
  • 55 MRP
  • 55.1 MRP SalesForecast
  • 55.2 MRP SalesForecastLine
  • 55.3 MRP Planner
  • 55.4 MRP PlanningMethod
  • 55.5 MRP PlanningMethodLine
  • 55.6 MRP Run Production
  • 55.7 MRP Run ProductionLine
  • 55.8 MRP Run Purchase
  • 55.9 MRP Run PurchaseLine
  • 56 Warehouse services
  • 56.1 M Locator Type
  • 56.2 M WH Schedule
  • 56.3 M WH Schedule Product
  • 56.4 M WH Period
  • 56.5 M WH Period Invoiced
  • 56.6 M InOutLine Type
  • 57 External POS
  • 57.1 C ExternalPOS
  • 57.2 C ExternalPOS Category
  • 57.3 C ExternalPOS Product
  • 57.4 M Product
  • 58 Import data
  • 58.1 AD ImpFormat
  • 58.2 AD ImpFormat Row
  • 58.3 I BPartner
  • 58.4 I Product
  • 58.5 I ElementValue
  • 58.6 I Order
  • 58.7 I Budgetline

ER model

Openbravo ERP
Version 1.0

Visit us at www.openbravo.com

Preface
This document represents Openbravo’s Entity Relation Diagram (ERD), created with data obtained from the Application Dictionary. The aim of the document is not to get a formal ERD, but to get a complete view of the tables and columns behind the functionalities of Openbravo ERP.

The diagram has been separated into several chapters according to the main functional modules of the ERP. The same table might appear in different chapters but only once in detail. This is done to emphasize the relation among the main tables of the chapter with the rest of the diagram. All the relations are represented among the examples, but those not representative in the chapter have been deleted.

The not implemented columns are those ones that aren’t being used in the ERP. They can be part of deleted functionalities, hidden or not used functionalities or they are about to be developed.

The tables of Openbravo have some common characteristics. All tables must have a unique primary key with columnname like tablename+ ID. The table name has to follow the prefix policy: • A: asset management • AD: application dictionary • C: core functionality • I: import temporary tables and processes • M: material management • FACT: Accounting tables. • GL: general ledger • MA: manufacturing • MRP: material resource • S: service management • CUS, PD, US, ZZ: personal developments. Common columns of all tables: • Created: date of record creation. 2/461

• CreatedBy: id of the user that has created the record. • Updated: date of the last update of the record. • UpdatedBy: id of the user that has commit the last update. • IsActive: logic delete of the record. • AD Client ID: id of the client owner of the record. AD Client ID = 0 is System client for System Administrator use. • AD Org ID: id of the organization owner of the record. AD Org ID = = is Asterisk organization that shares the record to all the organizations of the client.

3/461

Contents
1 Window, Tab and Field 1.1 AD Window . . . . 1.2 AD Tab . . . . . . 1.3 AD Image . . . . . 1.4 AD AuxiliarInput . 1.5 AD FieldGroup . . 1.6 AD Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 15 17 19 19 20 20 23 23 25 28 29 29 30 31 32 32 32 34 35 35 37 37 40 40 42 44 45 47 47 47 50 50 51 51 51 53 53

2 Table and column and attachments 2.1 AD Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 AD Column . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 AD Callout . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 AD Val Rule . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 AD Element . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 C File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 AD DataType . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Reference 3.1 AD Reference 3.2 AD Ref List . . 3.3 AD Ref Table . 3.4 AD Ref Search 3.5 AD Ref Search

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Column

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

4 Menu 4.1 AD Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Process, Form and Task 5.1 AD Process . . . . . 5.2 AD Process Para . . 5.3 AD Form . . . . . . 5.4 AD Task . . . . . . . 6 Workflow 6.1 AD Workflow . . . 6.2 AD WF Node . . . 6.3 AD WF Node Trl . 6.4 AD WF NodeNext 7 Tree 7.1 AD 7.2 AD 7.3 AD 7.4 AD

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

TreeNodePR TreeNodeBP TreeNode . . TreeBar . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

4/461

7.5 AD Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6 AD TreeNodeMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Internals: process execution, sequences, messages, log 8.1 AD PInstance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 AD PInstance Para . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 AD PInstance Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4 AD Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5 AD Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6 AD Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7 AD TextInterfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8 AD Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.9 AD Month . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

54 54 55 55 57 57 58 59 60 60 61 62 63 63 65 66 66 68 68 69 70 71 71 72 72 73 73 74 74 75 75 76 77 78 78 81 82 83 83 83 84 84

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

9 Model objects mapping 9.1 AD Model Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 AD Model Object Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Translations 10.1 AD Language . . . . 10.2 AD Window Trl . . . 10.3 AD Process Trl . . . 10.4 AD Tab Trl . . . . . 10.5 AD Element Trl . . . 10.6 AD FieldGroup Trl . 10.7 AD Reference Trl . . 10.8 AD Process Para Trl 10.9 AD Menu Trl . . . . 10.10 AD Message Trl . . 10.11 AD Field Trl . . . . . 10.12 AD TextInterfaces Trl 10.13 AD Task Trl . . . . . 10.14 AD Workflow Trl . . 10.15 AD Form Trl . . . . . 10.16 AD Ref List Trl . . . 10.17 AD WF Node Trl . . 11 Access 11.1 AD 11.2 AD 11.3 AD 11.4 AD 11.5 AD 11.6 AD 11.7 AD 11.8 AD

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

User . . . . . . . . User Roles . . . . Role . . . . . . . . Task Access . . . Window Access . Process Access . Workflow Access . Form Access . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

5/461

11.9 AD Role OrgAccess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.10 AD Table Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Country, Region and Location 12.1 C Country . . . . . . . . . . 12.2 C Country Trl . . . . . . . . 12.3 C Region . . . . . . . . . . 12.4 C Location . . . . . . . . .

85 85 86 86 88 89 89 91 91 93 95 97 98 99 99 100 100 102 103 103 105 105 107 107 107 109 116 117 118 118 119 121 123 123

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

13 System, Client, Org and Session info. 13.1 AD System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2 AD Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3 AD ClientInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4 AD Org . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5 AD OrgInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6 AD Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.7 AD Preference . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Warehouse, Shipper and Freigth 14.1 M Warehouse . . . . . . . . . 14.2 M Locator . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3 M Warehouse Shipper . . . . 14.4 M Freight . . . . . . . . . . . 14.5 M FreightCategory . . . . . . 14.6 M Shipper . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Business partner 15.1 C Greeting . . . . . 15.2 C Greeting Trl . . . 15.3 C BPartner . . . . . 15.4 C BPartner Location 15.5 C SalesRegion . . . 15.6 C BP Group . . . . 15.7 C BP TaxCategory . 15.8 C BP BankAccount 15.9 AD User . . . . . . . 15.10 InterestArea . . . R 15.11 ContactInterest . . R

Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

16 Payment term 125 16.1 C PaymentTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 16.2 C Paymenttermline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 16.3 C PaymentTerm Trl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

6/461

17 Product 17.1 M Product . . . . . . 17.2 M Product Category 17.3 M Substitute . . . . 17.4 M Product BOM . . 17.5 M Product Customer 17.6 M Product Org . . . 17.7 M Product PO . . . 17.8 M Replenish . . . . 17.9 M Product Template 17.10 Product UOM . . M 17.11 Costing . . . . . . M 17.12 Product Trl . . . . M

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

131 131 136 137 138 138 139 140 142 143 143 144 145

18 Unit of Measure 146 18.1 C UOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 18.2 C UOM Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 18.3 C UOM Trl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 19 Attribute 19.1 M Attribute . . . . . . . 19.2 M AttributeSet . . . . . 19.3 M AttributeValue . . . . 19.4 M AttributeUse . . . . . 19.5 M AttributeSetInstance . 19.6 M AttributeInstance . . 20 Pricing 20.1 M PriceList . . . . . . . 20.2 M PriceList Version . . 20.3 M ProductPrice . . . . . 20.4 M DiscountSchema . . 20.5 M DiscountSchemaLine 20.6 M Offer . . . . . . . . . 20.7 M Offer PriceList . . . . 20.8 M Offer BPartner . . . . 20.9 M Offer BP Group . . . 20.10 Offer Prod Cat . . . . M 20.11 Offer Product . . . . M 20.12 Discount . . . . . . . C 20.13 BPartner Discount . . C 150 150 152 152 153 153 154 155 155 157 158 158 159 162 163 163 164 164 164 165 165 167 167 167 169

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

21 Tax 21.1 C TaxCategory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2 C TaxCategory Trl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3 C Tax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/461

21.4 C Tax Trl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 21.5 C Tax Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 22 Currency 22.1 C Currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.2 C Currency Trl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.3 C Conversion Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 173 175 175

23 Document type 177 23.1 C DocType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 23.2 C DocType Trl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 24 Activity, Campaign and Channel 24.1 C Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.2 C Campaign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.3 C Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Order 25.1 C 25.2 C 25.3 C 25.4 C 25.5 C 182 182 184 185 186 186 188 193 196 196 198 198 200 200 201 203 203 208 209 211 212 213 214 215 216 218 219 220 222 223

Incoterms . . . . Order . . . . . . OrderLine . . . . OrderLine Offer OrderTax . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

26 Purchase specific 26.1 M Requisition . . . 26.2 M RequisitionLine 26.3 M MatchInv . . . . 26.4 M MatchPO . . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

27 Transaction 27.1 M InOut . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2 M InOutLine . . . . . . . . . . 27.3 M Movement . . . . . . . . . 27.4 M MovementLine . . . . . . . 27.5 M Inventory . . . . . . . . . . 27.6 M InventoryLine . . . . . . . 27.7 M Internal Consumption . . . 27.8 M Internal ConsumptionLine 27.9 M Production . . . . . . . . . 27.10 ProductionPlan . . . . . . M 27.11 ProductionLine . . . . . . . M 27.12 Transaction . . . . . . . . . M 27.13 Storage Detail . . . . . . . M 27.14 Storage Pending . . . . . M

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8/461

28 Invoice 28.1 C Invoice . . . . . . . . . . . 28.2 C Invoice Discount . . . . . . 28.3 C InvoiceLine . . . . . . . . . 28.4 C InvoiceLine Offer . . . . . 28.5 C InvoiceLine AcctDimension 28.6 C InvoiceTax . . . . . . . . . 29 Commission 29.1 C Commission . . . 29.2 C CommissionLine . 29.3 C CommissionRun . 29.4 C CommissionAmt . 29.5 C CommissionDetail 30 Rappel 30.1 M Rappel 30.2 M Rappel 30.3 M Rappel 30.4 M Rappel 30.5 M Rappel 30.6 M Rappel

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

224 224 229 229 231 232 232 234 234 236 237 238 239 241 241 243 243 244 244 245 246 246 246 248 249 253 255 255 257 258 259 260 261 261 263 263 264 267 267 270 272

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . Bpartner . . . . . Product . . . . . Productcategory Scale . . . . . . Invoice . . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

31 Project 31.1 C ProjectType . . . . . . 31.2 C Phase . . . . . . . . . 31.3 C Task . . . . . . . . . . 31.4 C Project . . . . . . . . 31.5 C ProjectPhase . . . . . 31.6 C ProjectTask . . . . . . 31.7 C ProjectLine . . . . . . 31.8 C Project Vendor . . . . 31.9 C ProjectProposal . . . 31.10 ProjectProposalLine . C 31.11 ProjectProposalTask . C 32 Services 32.1 S ExpenseType . . . 32.2 S TimeType . . . . . 32.3 S TimeExpense . . 32.4 S TimeExpenseLine

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

33 Payment management 33.1 C Settlement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2 C Debt Payment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3 C Glitem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9/461

. . . . . . . . . . . .4 C BankStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remittance Parameter . . . Remittance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 C ElementValue . . . . . 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 C Charge . . . . . . RemittanceLine . . . .3 C Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 C BP Group Acct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36. . . . .6 AD AccountingRpt Element 37 Account Element 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34. . . 34. . . . . . . 34. . .4 C PeriodControl . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 C 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 C Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 C Element . . . . . Remittance Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 C AcctSchema Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 C AcctSchema Table . . . . . . . . . . 34. 36 Accounting Schema 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34. . . . . . . . 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 C 33. . . . . . . .2 C Year . . . . . . .5 C AcctSchema Default .9 C 33. . . . . . . . . . 38 Accounting 317 38. .5 C NonBusinessDay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 C Cash . .11 C Debt Payment Balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 10/461 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 C CashLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 C 33. . . . . . . . . .5 C BankStatementLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 C 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35. . . . . . . . . 36. .7 C CashBook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Debt Payment Bal Replace DP Management . . . . . . . . . . . 35. .3 C BP Vendor Acct . . . . 37. 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Calendar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 273 274 275 276 276 277 278 280 280 282 283 285 286 288 289 290 291 292 292 292 294 295 295 297 297 299 301 301 302 308 310 310 312 314 314 315 34 Bank and Cash management 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Year and Period 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 C AcctSchema . . . . . .5 C ValidCombination . . . 34. . . . . . . .3 C PromissoryFormat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 C BankAccount . . . . . .33. . . . .4 C 33. . . .3 C ElementValue Operand 37. . . . . . .1 C Bank . . . . . . . . . . . .4 C ElementValue Trl . . . . . . . .4 C AcctSchema GL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 C BP Customer Acct . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 C 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DP ManagementLine . . 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42. . 41 Accounting Facts 355 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 MA Sequence Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 C CashBook Acct . . . . . . 370 11/461 . .7 C Tax Acct . . .11 Asset Acct . . . . .15 Warehouse Acct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 38.6 M Product Acct . . . . . . . . .14 Glitem Acct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Fact Acct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 MA Sequence Employee 42. . . . 38. . . . . . . 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 A Amortization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MA WRPhaseProduct . . .1 MA ProcessPlan . . . . . . . C 39 General Ledger and Budget 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40. . . . . 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C 38. . . . . . . . . . .12 Charge Acct . . . . . . . . . . . C 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40. . . . . . . . . . C 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 GL JournalLine . 43 Manufacturing: Work Requirement 366 43. . . . . . . . . A 38. . . . . . . . . . . .5 M Product Category Acct 38. . . . . . . . .4 C BP Employee Acct . . . . . . . . . .2 A Asset Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Assets 40. . . . . . . . . . . 38. . . . . . . . . . . . 366 43. . .2 MA WRPhase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Asset Group Acct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 C BudgetLine . . . . . . 355 42 Manufacturing: Process Plan 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 MA SequenceProduct . . . 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 A Amortizationline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 AcctSchema Default . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MA Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38.13 Project Acct . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 GL Category . . . . . . . .2 MA ProcessPlan Version 42. . . . . . . .5 MA Sequence IC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 C Budget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 A Asset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 43. . . . . . . . . . 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39. . . . . . . . . . . . 359 359 361 361 363 363 364 364 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 GL Journal . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 MA WorkRequirement .8 C BankAccount Acct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 328 329 329 330 331 337 337 337 340 342 344 344 347 347 352 352 354 . .2 GL JournalBatch . . .

. . . . 46 Manufacturing: Periodic Control 46. . . .1 MA Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48. . . . . . . . . .1 MA PL Employee . . . . . . . . . . 47. . . . . . . . . 48.3 MA Toolset Type . . . . . . . . . 47.3 MA PC Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 MA Measure Shift . . . . . . . .4 MA PC Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 MA Toolset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Manufacturing: Machine 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MA Maint Part . 46. . . . . 44. . 12/461 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 MA Machine Cost . . . . . 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 MA GlobalUse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 MA CCP . . . . . . . .5 MA WEEmployee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 MA ToolsetUsed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 MA Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 MA PL Machine . . . . . .3 MA PL InvoiceLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48. . . . . . 49. . . . . . . . 49. . . . . . . . . . .2 MA PL IC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 MA CCP Group . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 MA PC Value . . . . . . . . .4 MA Measure Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . 45. . . . . . . . . 47 Manufacturing: Critical Control Points 47. . . . .6 MA WEIncidence . . . . . . 371 371 371 373 373 374 374 375 376 378 379 381 381 381 383 383 385 385 385 387 387 389 389 389 391 392 392 393 393 395 395 397 397 398 398 399 401 401 401 403 404 . . . . .3 MA Machinestation . .2 MA ToolsetProcess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 MA Maint Periodicity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46. . . . . . . 47. .7 M Production . . . . . . . 48 Manufacturing: Maintenance 48.5 MA Maint Scheduled . . . . . .2 MA Maint Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 M ProductionPlan . . 44. . . . . 44. . . . . . . .7 MA Measure Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MA CCP Shift . . . . . . . 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47. . 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Manufacturing: Toolset 45. . .4 MA Machine Type . . . . . . . . . . . 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 M ProductionLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 MA Maint Worker . . . . . .6 MA Measure Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Manufacturing: Work Effort 44. . 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 MA Periodic Control .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 C Salary Category 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 405 405 407 407 408 51 Manufacturing: Indirect Cost 409 51. . . . . Cost . . . . . . . . . .1 MA Costcenter IC . 416 53. . Run ProductionLine Run Purchase . . . . . 431 13/461 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MA Costcenter Employee 50. . . . . . . .4 MRP 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MA Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 54 Salary Category 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SalesForecastLine . . .5 MRP 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 MA Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 C Salary Category 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 C Salary Category 54. . . . . . . . . . . .5 C Salary Category 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 MA Costcenter Version . . . .2 MA Indirect Cost Value . . . . . . . . . . 409 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 C Salary Category 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 C Salary Category 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Salary Category C 55 MRP 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 C Salary Category 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MRP 55. . . . . . . . . . . . SalesForecast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PlanningMethodLine Run Production . . .50 Manufacturing: Cost Center 50. . . . . . . . . . . .6 MRP 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 MA Indirect Cost . . Cost . . . . 429 56. . . . . . . . . . . . Run PurchaseLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50.8 C Salary Category 54. . . . 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 M WH Schedule Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 MRP 55. .4 MA CostCenter Machine 50. . . . .1 M Locator Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 MA Incidence . . . . . .2 C Salary Category 54. . . . 414 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 MRP 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 MRP 417 417 417 417 417 417 419 419 419 419 419 420 420 420 422 422 423 423 425 426 427 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 MA CostCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 53 Manufacturing: Work Station 414 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 MRP 55. . . PlanningMethod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Warehouse services 429 56. . . . . 409 52 Manufacturing: Incidence 412 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 M WH Schedule . . . . . . . .1 MA Process . . . . . . . .8 MRP 55. . . . Cost .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 57 External POS 57. . . . .4 M WH Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58. 58 Import data 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 I BPartner . 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 I Budgetline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 C ExternalPOS 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 M WH Period Invoiced . . . . . . . 58. .2 C ExternalPOS 57. . . . . . . . . . . . 432 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 AD ImpFormat . . . . . . . . 431 56. . . . . . . 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 M InOutLine Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 AD ImpFormat Row 58. . . . . . . .56. . . . . . . . . . . . .5 I ElementValue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/461 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 C ExternalPOS 57. . . . . 434 434 436 437 437 442 442 444 445 447 451 453 458 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category Product . . . . .4 M Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 I Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 I Product . . . . . .

Tab & Field defines the presentation of tables and columns within each window. copy the entity and select User! • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Image ID: Defines a system image 15/461 . Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. 1. For System Admin use only. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Transaction or Query) • IsSOTrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. The Field Group allows you to define subsections in a tab. depending on the tab that is edited. for instance a slection list. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. • AD Window ID: The Window field identifies a unique Window in the system. Tab and Field The Window. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.1 Window. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. For customizations. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • WindowType: The Window Type indicates the type of window being defined (Maintain. comment or help about the use of this item.1 AD Window The Window table defines each window in the system. The auxiliar inputs fix the values of a selected field.

16/461 Figure 1: Window. Tab and Field .

17/461 . • AD Tab ID: The Tab indicates a tab that displays within a window. If the level is 0. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • TabLevel: Hierarchical level of the tab. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Level 1 entries are dependent on level 0. • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. etc. • IsSingleRow: The Single Row Layout checkbox indicates if the default display type for this window is a single row as opposed to multi row. You cannot share data between Clients. comment or help about the use of this item. it is the top entity. Each Tab contains a discrete selection of fields. • IsInfoTab: The Accounting Tab checkbox indicates if this window contains accounting information. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 1. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Window ID: The Window field identifies a unique Window in the system.2 AD Tab The Tab Tab defines each Tab within a Window. • Help: The Help field contains a hint.• AD Color ID: Color for backgrounds or indicators • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value.

If defined. It may not be updated. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. sort. it decides. • AD Image ID: Defines a system image • ImportFields: Create Fields from Table Columns.columnname..e. the Order By replaces the default Order By clause. • IsReadOnly: The Read Only indicates that this field may only be Read.otherwise it is determined that the Order Column has a value of one or greater 18/461 .). The WHERE clause is added to the query. • AD ColumnSortOrder ID: Integer Column of the table determining the order (display. • AD ColumnSortYesNo ID: If a Included Column is defined. It should be fully qualified (i. tablename. • WhereClause: The Where Clause indicates the SQL WHERE clause to use for record selection. if a column is active in the ordering . • AD Column ID: Link to the database column of the table • HasTree: The Has Tree checkbox indicates if this window displays a tree metaphor. .• IsTranslationTab: The Translation Tab checkbox indicate if a tab contains translation information. Fully qualified means tablename. this process will create the fields that don’t exists in the tab but which exist in the correspondent table.columnname). • OrderByClause: The ORDER BY Clause indicates the SQL ORDER BY clause to use for record selection • CommitWarning: Warning or information displayed when committing the record Not implemented yet • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system.

• AD Image ID: Defines a system image • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. jpeg or png.4 AD AuxiliarInput To configure an auxiliar input.• IsSortTab: The Tab determines the Order. • FilterClause: Filter clause • EditReference: The form referenced in the edition command 1. For customizations. you need to select the corresponding tab. name the auxiliar inout and define a validation code. 1. • BinaryData: The Binary field stores binary data. If displayed in single row record. 19/461 . Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. copy the entity and select User! • Included Tab ID: You can include a Tab in a Tab. you can force that all payments are done in cash. • ImageURL: URL of image. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. the included tab is displayed as multi-row table.3 AD Image This table stores images that can be used in different places. You cannot share data between Clients. The image is not stored in the database. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. but retrieved at runtime. when selecting the payment method. An image can be stored as an URL or as binary data. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. For example. The image can be a gif.

• Ad Auxiliarinput Id: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.5 AD FieldGroup A field group is defined as a fields agrupation inside a tab. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Amounts. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD FieldGroup ID: The Field Group indicates the logical group that this field belongs to (History. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Quantities) • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Code: The Validation Code is the code that will be executed to determine the rule. 1. You cannot share data between Clients. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Tab ID: The Tab indicates a tab that displays within a window.6 AD Field The Field table defines the Fields displayed within a tab. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Changes made to the Field Tab become visible after restart due to caching • AD Field ID: The Field identifies a field on a database table. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 1. 20/461 . • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.

• IsHeading: The Heading Only checkbox indicates if just the label will display on the screen 21/461 . • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • SortNo: The Record Sort No indicates the ascending sort sequence of the records • IsSameLine: The Same Line checkbox indicates that the field will display on the same line as the previous field.• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. It may not be updated. Description and Help maintained in ’System Element’ table or ’Window’ table. • IsReadOnly: The Read Only indicates that this field may only be Read. Quantities) • IsDisplayed: If the field is displayed. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. the field Display Logic will determine at runtime. • IsCentrallyMaintained: The Centrally Maintained checkbox indicates if the Name. Amounts. it can be different that the actual size of the column (note that if it is bigger than the column the data will be truncated to the column size). • AD Column ID: Link to the database column of the table • AD FieldGroup ID: The Field Group indicates the logical group that this field belongs to (History. comment or help about the use of this item. • AD Tab ID: The Tab indicates a tab that displays within a window. if it is actually displayed • DisplayLogic: • DisplayLength: Display length is the size that will be appear for the field.

Not implemented yet • IsEncrypted: Display encryption . you will not be able to report the data via report tools) is set in the Column definition.all characters are displayed as ’*’. Data storage encryption (i.• IsFieldOnly: The Field Only checkbox indicates that the column will display without a label. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. 22/461 .e. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. copy the entity and select User! • ShowInRelation: When this field is set as ’Y’ the field will be shown in the relation view (as well as in the edition view). otherwise it only will be displayed in the edition view. For customizations.

• EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. For customizations. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. A view is always treated as read only in the system. • AccessLevel: Indicates the access level required for this record or process. The System Element is the Central Repository for Field Names Descriptions and Help/Comments. copy the entity and select User! • AD Window ID: The Window field identifies a unique Window in the system. The Validation Rules defines all dynamic rules used when entering and maintaining columns and fields. 23/461 . • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. • IsView: This is a view rather than a table. 2. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients. This data should be the same as the defined physically in the DB. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • TableName: The DB Table Name indicates the name of the table in database. comment or help about the use of this item. The File is used to store attributes of an attachment.1 AD Table In Table table are stored all the tables used in the application.2 Table and column and attachments The Table and Column defines all tables with their columns. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

24/461 Figure 2: Table and column and attachments .

¡BR¿Reference means that the data in this system is read only -¿ ¡BR¿Local means that the data in this system is not replicated to other systems .¡BR¿Merge means that the d • PO Window ID: Window for Purchase Order (AP) Zooms • IsDefaultAcct: Is default account Not implemented yet • SQL Record Identifier: SQL Record Identifier 2. you can only deselect the Active flag • IsHighVolume: The High Volume Checkbox indicates if a search screen will display as opposed to a pick list for selecting records from this table. • ImportTable: Import Table Columns from Database. • LoadSeq: Sequence of the table • IsSecurityEnabled: The Security Enabled checkbox indicates that user access to the data in this table can be restricted using Roles. • IsChangeLog: If selected.• AD Val Rule ID: The Validation Rule indicates a unique validation rule. a log of all changes is maintained. These rules define how an entry is determined to valid or invalid. Not implemented yet • ReplicationType: The Type of data Replication determines the directon of the data replication. If records cannot be deleted.2 AD Column Defines the columns of a table The Used in Column Tab defines the table and column this element resides in. this process will create in the application dictionary those columns defined in the table (in DB) but non-existing in the column table (of the application dictionary). • AD Column ID: Link to the database column of the table 25/461 . Not implemented yet • IsDeleteable: The Records Deleteable checkbox indicates if a record can be deleted from the database.

and DateDoc/DateAcct) c) SQL code with the tag: @SQL=SELECT something AS DefaultValue FROM . • FieldLength: The Length indicates the length of a column as defined in the database. the first not null value becomes the default value of the column. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • AD Reference ID: The Reference indicates the type of reference field • AD Reference Value ID: The Reference Value indicates where the reference values are stored.g.Accounting Schema: e.in format @Variable@ . #AD Client ID . copy the entity and select User! • ColumnName: The Column Name indicates the name of a column on a table as defined in the database. a) Literals:. These rules define how an entry is determined to valid or invalid. ’Text’ or 123 b) Variables . • AD Val Rule ID: The Validation Rule indicates a unique validation rule.C Calendar ID . For customizations. There can be 26/461 . The values are separated by comma or semicolon. CheckBoxes. #Date.Window values (all Picks. RadioButtons. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside... DateFormat . • DefaultValue: The defaults are evaluated in the order of definition. #AD Org ID. The SQL statement can contain variables.g. • Version: The Version indicates the version of this table definition. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. You cannot share data between Clients.Global defaults: e. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. C AcctSchema ID.g.Login e. It must be specified if the data type is Table or List. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. comment or help about the use of this item.

• IsMandatory: The Mandatory checkbox indicates if the field is required for a record to be save to the database. Parent. if no user preference is defined. Client as well as Buttons. • IsEncrypted: Display encryption . the column is listed in the first find window tab and in the selection part of the window 27/461 . • IsParent: The Parent checkbox indicates if this column is a link to the parent table. The default is only evaluated. • IsKey: The key column must also be display sequence 0 in the field definition and may be hidden. • VFormat: Value Format is the format the value will be displayed with. • IsUpdateable: The Updateable checkbox indicates if a field can be updated by the user.no other value other than the SQL statement. Data storage encryption (i. you will not be able to report the data via report tools) is set in the Column definition.all characters are displayed as ’*’. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. Not implemented yet • ValueMin: The Minimum Value indicates the lowest allowable value for a field. • ValueMax: The Maximum Value indicates the highest allowable value for a field • IsSelectionColumn: If selected.e. Default definitions are ignored for record columns as Key. • ReadOnlyLogic: Logic to determine if field is read only (applies only when field is read-write) • IsIdentifier: The Identifier checkbox indicates that this column is part of the identifier or key for this table.

callouts are Java classes that are executed when the content of a filed is modified. • AD Callout ID: The callout that will be fired when the content of a is modified. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.• AD Element ID: The System Element allows for the central maintenance of help. the database column definition is updated based on your entries in the Column definition of the Application Dictionary. descriptions and terminology for a database column.3 AD Callout This table defines the callouts. • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system. 28/461 . • IsSyncDatabase: When selected. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • AD Callout ID: The callout that will be fired when the content of a is modified. • IsSessionAttr: Checking this field the data for this column will be stored as session attribute so its content will be accessible from other tab. You cannot share data between Clients. 2. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • IsSecondaryKey: Is secondary key • IsDesencryptable: When Is Desencryptable field is ’Y’ the content of this column will be saved in a desencryptable way.

This can be SQL. • Code: The Validation Code is the code that will be executed to determine the rule. These rules define how an entry is determined to valid or invalid. • AD Element ID: The System Element allows for the central maintenance of help. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 29/461 . Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. • Type: The Type indicates the type of validation that will occur. • AD Val Rule ID: The Validation Rule indicates a unique validation rule.2.4 AD Val Rule The Validation Rules Tab defines all dynamic rules used when entering and maintaining columns and fields. copy the entity and select User! 2. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. You cannot share data between Clients. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. • ColumnName: The Column Name indicates the name of a column on a table as defined in the database.5 AD Element The Element Tab defines each system level element. For customizations. You cannot share data between Clients. Java Script or Java Language. descriptions and terminology for a database column. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.

You cannot share data between Clients. • C Datatype ID: Defines what kind of file is (txt. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. pdf.• EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. • PrintName: The Label to be printed indicates the name that will be printed on a document or correspondence.. comment or help about the use of this item. • C File ID: Attached file • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. xls. 30/461 .6 C File In this table are stored the files (using the name field) attached to different windows. For customizations. copy the entity and select User! • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • PO Name: Name on PO Screens • PO PrintName: Print name on PO Screens/Reports • PO Description: Description in PO Screens • PO Help: Help for PO Screens 2. The max length is 2000 characters. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten..).

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Format: Format is the description of the data type for the attachable files. 31/461 . • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. 2. • AD Datatype ID: Type of file • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Record ID: Record contains the key of the record the file is attached to. This key may belong to any table that’s why this column is generic and not specific for any table.• Seqno: The Sequence indicates the order of records • Text: The Text field stores the user entered information. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients.7 AD DataType Data type table contains the different types of files that can be attached to the records of the application.

3. Reference lists populate drop down list boxes in data entry screens 32/461 . For customizations. Not implemented yet • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. table or data type validation. These include list. copy the entity and select User! 3. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. comment or help about the use of this item. • VFormat: Value Format is the format the value will be displayed with.1 AD Reference The Reference Tab defines the references that are used to validate data • AD Reference ID: The Reference indicates the type of reference field • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. You cannot share data between Clients.2 AD Ref List The List Validation Tab defines lists to validate data • AD Ref List ID: The Reference List field indicates a list of reference values from a database tables.3 Reference The Reference defines each field type and its parameters. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • ValidationType: The Validation Type indicates the validation method to use. • Help: The Help field contains a hint.

33/461 Figure 3: Reference .

C Order). If you leave the search key empty.g. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Key: The Key Column indicates that this the unique identifier of a record on this table. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. 34/461 . • AD Reference ID: The Reference indicates the type of reference field • ValidFrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range • ValidTo: The Valid To date indicates the last day of a date range • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. You cannot share data between Clients. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. You cannot share data between Clients. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. the system automatically creates a numeric number.3 AD Ref Table The Table Validation Tab defines tables to validate data • AD Reference ID: The Reference indicates the type of reference field • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. For customizations. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. copy the entity and select User! 3.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

4 AD Ref Search • AD Ref Search ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Reference ID: The Reference indicates the type of reference field • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. • AD Column ID: Link to the database column of the table 3. • IsValueDisplayed: The Display Value checkbox indicates if the value column will display with the display column.columnname. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. copy the entity and select User! 3. For customizations. • WhereClause: The Where Clause indicates the SQL WHERE clause to use for record selection.• AD Display: The Display Column indicates the column that will display. Fully qualified means tablename. • OrderByClause: The ORDER BY Clause indicates the SQL ORDER BY clause to use for record selection • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary.5 AD Ref Search Column • AD Ref Search Column ID: 35/461 . The WHERE clause is added to the query. You cannot share data between Clients.

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Columntype: • Column Suffix: 36/461 . • AD Ref Search ID: • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Columnname: The Column Name indicates the name of a column on a table as defined in the database. You cannot share data between Clients.

• IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. • AD Task ID: The Task field identifies a Operation System Task in the system. • IsSOTrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. • AD Window ID: The Window field identifies a unique Window in the system. • Action: The Action field indicates the Action to be performed for this element. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • AD Menu ID: The Menu identifies a unique Menu. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Menus are used to control the display of those screens a user has access to. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.4 Menu The Menu defines the Menu which will display. • AD Workflow ID: The Workflow field identifies a unique Workflow in the system. It may not be updated. • IsReadOnly: The Read Only indicates that this field may only be Read.1 AD Menu The Menu Tab defines the tree structured menu which will be used for the selected Organization. The menu items that each user will see depends upon the security defined. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 37/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. 4.

38/461 Figure 4: Menu .

• AD Workbench ID: Collection of windows. reports • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary.• AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system. • AD Form ID: The Special Form field identifies a unique Special Form in the system. copy the entity and select User! • Url: The URL defines an online address for this Business Partner. 39/461 . Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. For customizations.

The Tasks defines the different tasks used in workflows and the access level for those tasks.5 Process. the system automatically creates a numeric number.1 AD Process The Report and Process Tab defines each report and process run in the system. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. 5. comment or help about the use of this item. If you leave the search key empty. The Report & Process is used to define the parameters and access rules for every Report and Process within the system. For customizations. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients.g. • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. Form and Task The Forms defines any window which is not automatically generated. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. copy the entity and select User! • IsUserStartable: The User can start Process checkbox indicates that this process can be initiated by the user (as opposed to system initiated) Not implemented yet 40/461 . • AccessLevel: Indicates the access level required for this record or process. C Order).

Form and Task .41/461 Figure 5: Process.

• ProcedureName: The Procedure indicates the name of the database procedure called by this report or process. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD ReportView ID: The Report View indicates the view used to generate this report.2 AD Process Para The Report Parameter table defines any parameters required to execute a report or process. • IsReport: The Report checkbox indicates that this record is a report as opposed to a process • IsDirectPrint: The Direct Print checkbox indicates that this report will print without a print dialog box being displayed. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • AD PrintFormat ID: The print format determines how data is rendered for print. • Statistic Count: Internal statistics. • IsBackground: The background process run with the application in a planned time 5. • AD Process Para ID: Process Parameter identifies the parameters of a process or report. • Classname: The Classname identifies the Java classname used by this report or process. 42/461 . • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. this field counts how many times the process has been executed. • Statistic Seconds: Internal statistics how many seconds have been used the process while it was being executed.

comment or help about the use of this item. if no user 43/461 .g. The values are separated by comma or semicolon. • IsMandatory: The Mandatory checkbox indicates if the field is required for a record to be save to the database.Window values (all Picks. and DateDoc/DateAcct) c) SQL code with the tag: @SQL=SELECT something AS DefaultValue FROM . • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • AD Reference ID: The Reference indicates the type of reference field • AD Reference Value ID: The Reference Value indicates where the reference values are stored. DateFormat . • Help: The Help field contains a hint. RadioButtons..• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.Login e.C Calendar ID . • IsRange: The Range checkbox indicates that this parameter is a range of values.in format @Variable@ . CheckBoxes. It must be specified if the data type is Table or List. #Date. • ColumnName: The Column Name indicates the name of a column on a table as defined in the database. C AcctSchema ID. • DefaultValue: The defaults are evaluated in the order of definition.g. a) Literals:. • FieldLength: The Length indicates the length of a column as defined in the database.g. Description and Help maintained in ’System Element’ table or ’Window’ table. the first not null value becomes the default value of the column. The SQL statement can contain variables. The default is only evaluated. There can be no other value other than the SQL statement. These rules define how an entry is determined to valid or invalid. #AD Org ID. ’Text’ or 123 b) Variables .Accounting Schema: e. #AD Client ID . • AD Val Rule ID: The Validation Rule indicates a unique validation rule. • IsCentrallyMaintained: The Centrally Maintained checkbox indicates if the Name. • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system..Global defaults: e.

C Calendar ID . #AD Client ID .g. copy the entity and select User! 5. ’Text’ or 123 b) Variables .Global defaults: e. descriptions and terminology for a database column.g.Accounting Schema: e. You cannot share data between Clients. and DateDoc/DateAcct) c) SQL code with the tag: @SQL=SELECT something AS DefaultValue FROM .in format @Variable@ . • ValueMax: The Maximum Value indicates the highest allowable value for a field • AD Element ID: The System Element allows for the central maintenance of help.g. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. The values are separated by comma or semicolon. #AD Org ID. Default definitions are ignored for record columns as Key. CheckBoxes. There can be no other value other than the SQL statement. RadioButtons. • AD Form ID: The Special Form field identifies a unique Special Form in the system. 44/461 . • DefaultValue2: The defaults are evaluated in the order of definition. For System Admin use only. Not implemented yet • ValueMin: The Minimum Value indicates the lowest allowable value for a field. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. Parent. if no user preference is defined. Default definitions are ignored for record columns as Key.3 AD Form The Forms Tab defines any window which is not automatically generated.Window values (all Picks. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Parent. #Date. C AcctSchema ID. DateFormat . a) Literals:. The SQL statement can contain variables.. Client as well as Buttons. Client as well as Buttons. the first not null value becomes the default value of the column. • VFormat: Value Format is the format the value will be displayed with.Login e. The default is only evaluated. For customizations..preference is defined.

• AD Task ID: The Task field identifies a Operation System Task in the system. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. For example it can be used to starting a back up process or performing a file transfer. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. comment or help about the use of this item. • AccessLevel: Indicates the access level required for this record or process. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. You cannot share data between Clients. • Classname: The Classname identifies the Java classname used by this report or process.4 AD Task The Task Tab defines the unique tasks that will be used. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Help: The Help field contains a hint.• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 45/461 . • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • OS Command: The OS Command is for optionally defining a command to that will be part of this task. copy the entity and select User! 5. For customizations. • AccessLevel: Indicates the access level required for this record or process. comment or help about the use of this item.

Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. For customizations. 46/461 .• EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. copy the entity and select User! • ClassName: The Classname identifies the Java classname used by this report or process.

1 AD Workflow The Workflow Tab defines Workflows in the system. comment or help about the use of this item. the access level for the Workflow and the Nodes or Steps within the Workflow. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 47/461 . The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • AD WF Node ID: The Workflow Node indicates a unique step or process in a Workflow. • AD Workflow ID: The Workflow field identifies a unique Workflow in the system.2 AD WF Node The Node Tab defines each Node or step in this Workflow. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. For customizations. 6. • AccessLevel: Indicates the access level required for this record or process. copy the entity and select User! 6. • AD WF Node ID: The Workflow Node indicates a unique step or process in a Workflow. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.6 Workflow The Workflow defines Workflows in the system.

48/461 Figure 6: Workflow .

You cannot share data between Clients. Description and Help maintained in ’System Element’ table or ’Window’ table. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system. comment or help about the use of this item. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Workflow ID: The Workflow field identifies a unique Workflow in the system. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. • Workflow ID: The Workflow field identifies a unique workflow. • AD Window ID: The Window field identifies a unique Window in the system. copy the entity and select User! • Xposition: Absolute X (horizontal) position in 1/72 of an inch Not implemented yet • Yposition: Absolute Y (vertical) position in 1/72 of an inch Not implemented yet 49/461 . • Action: The Action field indicates the Action to be performed for this element. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. A workflow is a grouping of related tasks. • IsCentrallyMaintained: The Centrally Maintained checkbox indicates if the Name. • AD Form ID: The Special Form field identifies a unique Special Form in the system. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. in a specified sequence and optionally including approvals • AD Task ID: The Task field identifies a Operation System Task in the system. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. For customizations.

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • AD WF Next ID: The Next Node indicates the next step or task in this Workflow. the window must be regenerated. • Help: The Help field contains a hint.4 AD WF NodeNext The Next Nodes Tab defines the order or Nodes or Steps in a Workflow. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD WF Node ID: The Workflow Node indicates a unique step or process in a Workflow. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.6. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Condition: The Condition field identifies the condition that must be met before the Workflow can proceed to the next task. Not implemented yet 50/461 .3 AD WF Node Trl Allows the translation of any workflow node of the application. After the edition. • AD WF Node ID: The Workflow Node indicates a unique step or process in a Workflow. comment or help about the use of this item. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. 6.

1 AD TreeNodePR This table defines the relations of nodes for trees of products. Trees define roll ups or summary levels of information. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. They are used in reports for defining report points and summarization levels. • AD Tree ID: The Tree field identifies a unique Tree in the system. 7. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Parent ID: The Parent indicates the value used to represent a summary level or report to level for a record • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records 7.2 AD TreeNodeBP This table defines relations of nodes for trees of Business Partners. • Parent ID: The Parent indicates the value used to represent a summary level or report to level for a record 51/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Tree ID: The Tree field identifies a unique Tree in the system. • Node ID: Identifies a tree node.7 Tree The Tree and Node Image defines the descriptors and images that will be used when a Tree is displayed. Trees define roll ups or summary levels of information. They are used in reports for defining report points and summarization levels. • Node ID: Identifies a tree node.

52/461 Figure 7: Tree .

You cannot share data between Clients. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • Node ID: Identifies a tree node.• SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records 7. • AD Tree ID: The Tree field identifies a unique Tree in the system. Trees define roll ups or summary levels of information. They are used in reports for defining report points and summarization levels. • Node ID: Identifies a tree node. • AD Tree ID: The Tree field identifies a unique Tree in the system. • Parent ID: The Parent indicates the value used to represent a summary level or report to level for a record • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records 7. 53/461 . You cannot share data between Clients.3 AD TreeNode This table defines the relations of nodes for generic trees.4 AD TreeBar This table defines the relations between nodes for bookmarks trees. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Trees define roll ups or summary levels of information. They are used in reports for defining report points and summarization levels.

you may define one tree for your Products and another tree for your Business Partners. • AD Tree ID: The Tree field identifies a unique Tree in the system. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.7. • IsAllNodes: If this field is checked all nodes are included 7. Trees define roll ups or summary levels of information. They are used in reports for defining report points and summarization levels. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.5 AD Tree The Tree table defines all the trees that will be used in the application. • Node ID: Identifies a tree node. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.6 AD TreeNodeMM This table defines the relations of nodes for menu tree. You cannot share data between Clients. • TreeType: The Tree Type / Area field determines the type of tree this is. You cannot share data between Clients. They are used in reports for defining report points and summarization levels. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Tree ID: The Tree field identifies a unique Tree in the system. • Parent ID: The Parent indicates the value used to represent a summary level or report to level for a record • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records 54/461 . • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. For example. Trees define roll ups or summary levels of information.

Change the way document numbers are generated. • Record ID: The Record ID is the internal unique identifier of a record • IsProcessing: When the process is being accomplished this record has ’Y’ value. The Sequence defines how document numbers will be sequenced. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • ErrorMsg: In this filed is stored the error message in case the process fails. Every time a process is executed a new instance of it is created. 55/461 . This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • Result: The Result indicates the result of any action taken on this request. messages. log The Message defines the Message Text and Message Tips for each system generated message. • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. sequences.1 AD PInstance This table is used internally by the application.8 Internals: process execution. 8. • AD PInstance ID: Process Instance identifies the instance of a process. You may add a prefix or a suffix or change the current number. You cannot share data between Clients. Whenever a process is called a new line is added to this table including the process identifier and the record that called the process. • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system. otherwise it has ’N’. The system creates messages while performing processes.

messages. sequences.56/461 Figure 8: Internals: process execution. log .

• Info: The Information displays data from the source document line. • P String: String passed as parameter to a process instance. • P Number To: Number passed as maximun range as parameter to a process instance. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 8. • P Number: Number passed as parameter to a process instance. • Info To: The Information displays data from the source document line. • P Date: Date passed as parameter to a process instance. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • ParameterName: Name describing the parameter. • AD PInstance ID: Process Instance identifies the instance of a process. • AD PInstance ID: Process Instance identifies the instance of a process. 57/461 .8. You cannot share data between Clients. Every time a process is executed a new instance of it is created. • P Date To: Date passed as maximun date as parameter to a process instance. Every time a process is executed a new instance of it is created.2 AD PInstance Para Process Instance Parameter contains the values of the parameters that are passed to a process instance. • P String To: String passed as maximun string range to a process instance.3 AD PInstance Log Maintains a log of process instances.

58/461 . • P ID: Process ID • P Number: Number passed as parameter to a process instance. • AD Note ID: Identifies a System Notice • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.4 AD Note The Notice Tab provides a method of viewing messages that are generated by this system when performing processes. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. • Record ID: The Record ID is the internal unique identifier of a record • Text: The Text field stores the user entered information. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed.• Log ID: Log identifier • P Date: Date passed as parameter to a process instance. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • AD Message ID: Information and Error messages • Reference: The Reference displays the source document number. • P Msg: Process Message 8.

• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • IsAudited: The Activate Audit checkbox indicates if an audit trail of numbers generated will be kept. Not implemented yet • IsAutoSequence: The Auto Numbering checkbox indicates if the system will assign the next number automatically. • IsTableID: The Used for Record ID checkbox indicates if the document id will be used as the key to the record • Prefix: The Prefix indicates the characters to print in front of the document number. 59/461 . • AD Sequence ID: The Sequence defines the numbering sequence to be used for documents. You cannot share data between Clients.5 AD Sequence The Sequence Tab defines the numeric sequencing to use for documents. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. These can also include a alpha suffix and / or prefix.8. • IncrementNo: The Increment indicates the number to increment the last document number by to arrive at the next sequence number • StartNo: The Start Number indicates the starting position in the line or field number in the line • CurrentNext: The Current Next indicates the next number to use for this document • CurrentNextSys: This field is for system use only and should not be modified. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • VFormat: Value Format is the format the value will be displayed with.

8. this texts are stored in order to be used during the translation process. the system automatically creates a numeric number. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary.• Suffix: The Suffix indicates the characters to append to the document number. • MsgType: The Message Type indicates the type of message being defined. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. • AD Textinterfaces ID: Identifies a text in a manually created window. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName.6 AD Message The Message Tab displays error message text and menu messages • AD Message ID: Information and Error messages • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. copy the entity and select User! 8. You cannot share data between Clients. C Order). For customizations. • StartNewYear: The Restart Sequence Every Year checkbox indicates that the documents sequencing should return to the starting number on the first day of the year. Menu and Error.7 AD TextInterfaces Texts for manual interfaces. 60/461 . • MsgText: The Message Text indicates the message that will display • MsgTip: The Message Tip defines additional help or information about this message.g. Valid message types are Informational. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. If you leave the search key empty.

You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Columnname: The Column Name indicates the name of a column on a table as defined in the database.8 AD Dimension The dimensions are needed for the multidimensional analisys reports • AD Dimension ID: Identifies a dimension for multidemensional analisys reports • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 61/461 . • Filename: 8. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. • Join Group1: • Tablename: The DB Table Name indicates the name of the table in database.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Text: The Text field stores the user entered information. • Join Group2: • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. You cannot share data between Clients.

If you leave the search key empty.9 AD Month It is necessary to configurate the months of the year to the terms of the year. • Quarter: Defines in which quarter of the year is placed the month 62/461 . • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. You cannot share data between Clients. C Order). The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. the system automatically creates a numeric number.8.g. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • AD Month ID: A month of the year.

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • ClassName: The Classname identifies the Java classname used by this report or process. • AD Task ID: The Task field identifies a Operation System Task in the system. • Action: The Action field indicates the Action to be performed for this element. • AD Reference ID: The Reference indicates the type of reference field • AD Callout ID: The callout that will be fired when the content of a is modified. • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Workbench ID: Collection of windows.1 AD Model Object • AD Model Object ID: Identifies an object of the dictionary. processes. 63/461 . • AD Tab ID: The Tab indicates a tab that displays within a window.) 9. reports • AD Form ID: The Special Form field identifies a unique Special Form in the system. • AD Workflow ID: The Workflow field identifies a unique Workflow in the system. forms. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value..9 Model objects mapping The Model Objects Mapping defines all the mappings for each of the application elements (tabs..

64/461 Figure 9: Model objects mapping .

2 AD Model Object Mapping This table contains the mappings (how the classes are accessed) for the objects of the dictionary.9. 65/461 . • AD Model Object Mapping ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MappingName: • Isdefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. • AD Model Object ID: Identifies an object of the dictionary. You cannot share data between Clients.

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. You cannot share data between Clients.http://www. For the language code.1 AD Language If you want to add an additional User Interface language. Please notify your system administrator to run the language maintenance scripts to enable the use of this language. the system allows you to just translate elements for printing documents.din. If the language is not supplied. if you want to have translated screens available in this language. • LanguageISO: The ISO Language Code indicates the standard ISO code for a language in lower case. Information can be found at http://www. 66/461 . • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. you can translate the terms yourself. fr CN .org/trade/rec/rec03en.g.edu/pub/ietf/http/related/iso639.unece. we suggest using the Java convention of country and language (e. select System Language. The Language needs to be a (verified) System Language • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.de/gremien/nas/nabd/iso3166ma/codlstp1.uci.txt • CountryCode: For details .Canadian French). 10. Otherwise the language is only used for printing documents.htm • IsBaseLanguage: • IsSystemLanguage: Select.10 Translations The Translations allows you to define multiple parallel language for users.html or .ics. This allows users to access the same data but have the application elements appear in different languages. you can change the User Interface to this language (after translation).If a language is a System Language.http://www. Otherwise. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.

67/461 Figure 10: Translations .

• IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated.2 AD Window Trl This tab contains the windows translation to different languages. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. It is important to check the translated option. You cannot share data between Clients. comment or help about the use of this item.3 AD Process Trl Shows report tab translation for several languages This tab contains the process translation to different languages. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients. It is important to check the translated option. • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 10. 68/461 . • AD Window ID: The Window field identifies a unique Window in the system. • Help: The Help field contains a hint.• AD Language ID: 10. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated.4 AD Tab Trl Allows the translation of any tab of the application. 10. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. comment or help about the use of this item. the window must be regenerated. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. comment or help about the use of this item. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients. • CommitWarning: Warning or information displayed when committing the record • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated.After the edition. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 69/461 . • AD Tab ID: The Tab indicates a tab that displays within a window.• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. You cannot share data between Clients. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • PO Name: Name on PO Screens • PO PrintName: Print name on PO Screens/Reports • PO Description: Description in PO Screens • PO Help: Help for PO Screens • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated.10. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Element ID: The System Element allows for the central maintenance of help. 70/461 . comment or help about the use of this item. It is important to check the translated option. • PrintName: The Label to be printed indicates the name that will be printed on a document or correspondence. The max length is 2000 characters.5 AD Element Trl This tab contains the elements translation to different languages. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. descriptions and terminology for a database column.

Amounts. You cannot share data between Clients. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. 71/461 . which are not centrally maintained. • AD FieldGroup ID: The Field Group indicates the logical group that this field belongs to (History. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.10. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 10. Quantities) • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.6 AD FieldGroup Trl This tab contains field group translations to different languages Run Synchronize Terminology to update menu translation. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.7 AD Reference Trl • AD Reference ID: The Reference indicates the type of reference field • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. comment or help about the use of this item. After the edition. the window must be regenerated. You need only to translate Fields. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.

The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. comment or help about the use of this item. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.9 AD Menu Trl Menu translations are derived from Window.8 AD Process Para Trl Shows parameter tab translation for several languages • AD Process Para ID: Process Parameter identifies the parameters of a process or report. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. You cannot share data between Clients. You only need to translate Summary level items. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • AD Menu ID: The Menu identifies a unique Menu. Run Synchronize Terminology to update menu translation. Menus are used to control the display of those screens a user has access to. You cannot share data between Clients.10. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. 72/461 . etc. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. Process. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 10. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.

• AD Message ID: Information and Error messages • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. You cannot share data between Clients.11 AD Field Trl Fields are automatically translated. 10.10 AD Message Trl This tab contains the messages translation to different languages. • MsgText: The Message Text indicates the message that will display • MsgTip: The Message Tip defines additional help or information about this message. if centrally maintained. Allows the translation of any field of the application. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Field ID: The Field identifies a field on a database table.• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. After the edition. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. the window must be regenerated. 73/461 . You only need to translate not centrally maintained Fields. 10. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. It is important to check the translated option.

You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 10. comment or help about the use of this item. 74/461 . • Istranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.13 AD Task Trl Allows the translation of any task of the application. the window must be regenerated. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. After the edition. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. 10.12 AD TextInterfaces Trl • AD Textinterfaces ID: Identifies a text in a manually created window. • AD Task ID: The Task field identifies a Operation System Task in the system. • Text: The Text field stores the user entered information.

You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.After the edition. 10. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Workflow ID: The Workflow field identifies a unique Workflow in the system. comment or help about the use of this item. • AD Form ID: The Special Form field identifies a unique Special Form in the system.15 AD Form Trl This tab contains form tab data translation to different languages Allows the translation of any form of the application. the window must be regenerated. the window must be regenerated. 10.14 AD Workflow Trl Allows the translation of any workflow of the application. 75/461 .• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. comment or help about the use of this item. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. After the edition.

You cannot share data between Clients. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated.16 AD Ref List Trl Allows the translation of any reference list of the application. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 10. After the edition. the window must be regenerated. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. Reference lists populate drop down list boxes in data entry screens • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.• AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 76/461 . comment or help about the use of this item. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • AD Ref List ID: The Reference List field indicates a list of reference values from a database tables. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

• IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. You cannot share data between Clients. the window must be regenerated. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. comment or help about the use of this item. After the edition. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.10. 77/461 . • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD WF Node ID: The Workflow Node indicates a unique step or process in a Workflow. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.17 AD WF Node Trl Allows the translation of any workflow node of the application. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

11. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. 78/461 . You may add additional roles to control access for specific functionality or data. he Forms Window defines any window which is not automatically generated. The Table and Column defines all tables with their columns The User allows you to define each User of the system. Prior to generating Orders you must define your customers. The Report & Process is used to define the parameters and access rules for every Report and Process within the system. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. you must define your vendors. Roles control access to windows. You cannot share data between Clients. The Window. The User identifies a unique user in the system. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Passwords are required to identify authorized users. etc. vendors and employees. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. This includes customers. The Maintain Tasks defines the different tasks used in workflows and the access level for those tasks.1 AD User The User Tab defines the log in for Users who have access to the system. Prior to entering or importing products. reports. Tab & Field defines the presentation of tables and columns within each window. the access level for the Workflow and the Nodes or Steps within the Workflow.You can add users to the role. The Workflow defines Workflows in the system. The Role allows you to define the different roles that users of this system will have. For System Admin use only.11 Access Maintain Data Access Roles of Roles/Responsibilties The Business Partner allows you do define any party with whom you transact. tasks. • Password: The Password indicates the Password for this User Id. For a client an Administrator and User role are predefined. Users can log into the system and have access to functionality via one or more roles.

79/461 Figure 11: Access .

• Email: The Email Address is the Electronic Mail ID for this User and should be fully qualified (e. Employee or Salesperson • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record.g. • PA Goal ID: The Performance Goal indicates what this users performance will be measured against. This can include Vendor. • PA GoalPrivate ID: The Personal Goals displays goals that a user will set for themselves.smith@company. • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • C Greeting ID: The Greeting identifies the greeting to print on correspondence. • Phone: The Phone field identifies a telephone number • Phone2: The 2nd Phone field identifies an alternate telephone number. • Comments: The Comments field allows for free form entry of additional information. joe. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. Customer. • Title: The Title indicates the name that an entity is referred to as. • EmailUser: The user name in the mail system is usually the string before the @ of your email address. • Fax: The Fax identifies a facsimile number for this Business Partner or Location 80/461 . Required if the mail server requires authentification to send emails.com). • EmailUserPW: Required if the mail server requires authentification to send emails. • Supervisor ID: The Supervisor indicates who will be used for forwarding and escalating issues for this user.

You cannot share data between Clients. processes and workflows that a User has access to. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.• LastContact: The Last Contact indicates the date that this Business Partner Contact was last contacted. with centralized services. 81/461 . The Roles will determine what windows. • Birthday: Birthday or Anniversary day • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). Not implemented yet • Firstname: First Name of the contact • Lastname: Last name of the contact • UserName: Name that identifies the user in the System 11. • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • AD Role ID: The Role determines security and access a user who has this Role will have in the System. tasks.2 AD User Roles The User Roles Tab define the Roles each user may have. and inter-organization transactions. The User Assignment Tab displays Users who have been defined for this Role. • LastResult: The Last Result identifies the result of the last contact made. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment.

Multiple Clients are delimited by a comma ’. Organization level data.11.’. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. ¡BR¿If the Role User Level is Manual. Multiple Organizations are delimited by a comma ’. You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. You can give users access to this role and modify the access of this role to windows.3 AD Role Define the role and add the client and organizations the role has access to. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • AmtApproval: The Approval Amount field indicates the amount limit this Role has for approval of documents. 82/461 . • AD Tree Menu ID: Tree Menu • IsManual: The Manual check box indicates if the process will done manually. • UserLevel: The User Level field determines if users of this Role will have access to System level data. the as Select Role for with Data Access Restrictions • AD Role ID: The Role determines security and access a user who has this Role will have in the System. forms. • OrgList: The Organization List indicates the Organizations (by organization id) that this Role can access. Client level data or Client and Organization level data.’. processes and reports as well as tasks. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • ClientList: Indicates the Clients (by client id) that this Role can access.

You cannot share data between Clients. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Window ID: The Window field identifies a unique Window in the system. 83/461 . The Task Access Tab defines the Roles that will have access to this task and the type of access each Role is granted.4 AD Task Access The Task Access Tab defines the Task and type of access that this Role is granted. • IsReadWrite: The Read Write indicates that this field may be read and updated.11. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.5 AD Window Access The Window Access Tab defines the Roles which have access to this Window. 11. • IsReadWrite: The Read Write indicates that this field may be read and updated. The Window Access Tab defines the Windows and type of access that this Role is granted.6 AD Process Access The Process Access Tab defines the Processes and type of access that this Role is granted. 11. • AD Role ID: The Role determines security and access a user who has this Role will have in the System. • AD Task ID: The Task field identifies a Operation System Task in the system. The Report Access Tab determines who can access a report or process • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system. • AD Role ID: The Role determines security and access a user who has this Role will have in the System. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.• AD Role ID: The Role determines security and access a user who has this Role will have in the System. • AD Workflow ID: The Workflow field identifies a unique Workflow in the system. The Forms Access Tab defines the access rules for this form • AD Form ID: The Special Form field identifies a unique Special Form in the system. You cannot share data between Clients. • IsReadWrite: The Read Write indicates that this field may be read and updated. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Role ID: The Role determines security and access a user who has this Role will have in the System. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Role ID: The Role determines security and access a user who has this Role will have in the System. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The Workflow Access Tab defines the Roles who have access to this Workflow. 84/461 .7 AD Workflow Access The Workflow Access Tab defines the Workflows and type of access that this Role is granted.8 AD Form Access The Form Access Tab defines the Forms and type of access that this Role is granted. • IsReadWrite: The Read Write indicates that this field may be read and updated. 11. 11.

You cannot share data between Clients. the role cannot access the data specified. • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. the Role can(not) access all data of this table. • IsReadOnly: The Read Only indicates that this field may only be Read.9 AD Role OrgAccess Add the client organizations the user has access to. • IsExclude: If selected.• IsReadWrite: The Read Write indicates that this field may be read and updated. 11.10 AD Table Access If listed here. It may not be updated. even if the role has access to the functionality • AD Role ID: The Role determines security and access a user who has this Role will have in the System. You cannot share data between Clients. the role can ONLY access the data specified 85/461 . 11. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Role ID: The Role determines security and access a user who has this Role will have in the System. If not selected.

• CountryCode: For details . You cannot share data between Clients. the Region Tab is accessible. The Location defines the address data within the system. Region and Location The Countries.htm • HasRegion: The Country has Region checkbox is selected if the Country being defined is divided into regions. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.html or . • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.org/trade/rec/rec03en. If this checkbox is selected. Regions and Cities defines the different entities that can be used in any address field. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Country ID: The Country defines a Country. Values entered here are referenced in location records for Business Partners.http://www.http://www.din. It defines the format of the address as well as associating Regions with Countries and Cities with Regions or Countries.1 C Country The Country Tab defines any country in which you do business. The following notations are used: @C@=City @P@=Postal @A@=PostalAdd @R@=Region 86/461 . The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.unece. • ExpressionPhone: Phone Format • DisplaySequence: The Address Print format defines the format to be used when this address prints.de/gremien/nas/nabd/iso3166ma/codlstp1. 12. Each Country must be defined before it can be used in any document. • RegionName: The Region Name defines the name that will print when this region is used in a document.12 Country.

87/461 Figure 12: Country. Region and Location .

• AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • RegionName: The Region Name defines the name that will print when this region is used in a document. • ExpressionPostal Add: Additional Postal Format • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record 12. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.• ExpressionPostal: Postal code Format • HasPostal Add: The Additional Postal Code checkbox indicates if this address uses an additional Postal Code. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 88/461 . The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.2 C Country Trl Translation • C Country ID: The Country defines a Country. If it is selected an additional field displays for entry of the additional Postal Code. You cannot share data between Clients. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. Each Country must be defined before it can be used in any document.

• C Country ID: The Country defines a Country. apartment number or similar information. 89/461 .• DisplaySequence: The Address Print format defines the format to be used when this address prints. • C Location ID: The Location / Address field defines the location of an entity. This tab is enabled only if the Has Region checkbox is selected for the Country. • Address1: The Address 1 identifies the address for an entity’s location • Address2: The Address 2 provides additional address information for an entity. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 12.4 C Location The Location Tab defines the location of an Organization. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. It can be used for building location. Each Country must be defined before it can be used in any document. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.3 C Region The Region Tab defines a Region within a Country. • C Region ID: The Region identifies a unique Region for this Country. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The following notations are used: @C@=City @P@=Postal @A@=PostalAdd @R@=Region 12.

90/461 . if appropriate. • Postal Add: The Additional ZIP or Postal Code identifies. • C Region ID: The Region identifies a unique Region for this Country. • Postal: The Postal Code field identifies the postal code for this entity’s address. any additional Postal Code information. • C Country ID: The Country defines a Country. Each Country must be defined before it can be used in any document.• City: The City identifies a unique City for this Country or Region. • C City ID: City in a country • RegionName: The Region Name defines the name that will print when this region is used in a document.

Each Client will have one or more Organizations reporting to it.Please no not add additional records. Non Monetary UOM’s). The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. An Organization is often a legal entity or sub-unit for which documents and transactions are processed 13. • ReleaseNo: Internal Release Number • SupportUnits: • Password: The Password indicates the Password for this User Id. History of Online or Web Sessions The Client is the highest level of an independent business entity. Not implemented yet • UserName: Name that identifies the user in the System • Info: The Information displays data from the source document line. Each Client defines the accounting parameters (Accounting Schema. Preferences Common System Definition . The Organization Window allows you to define and maintain Organizational entities.1 AD System Common System Definition.13 System. Do NOT create additional records!! • AD System ID: Common System Definition • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Org and Session info. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. ¡BR¿Reference means that the data in this system is read only -¿ ¡BR¿Local 91/461 . Client. Not implemented yet • Version: The Version indicates the version of this table definition. Passwords are required to identify authorized users. You cannot share data between Clients.Only one Record . • ReplicationType: The Type of data Replication determines the directon of the data replication. Tree definition.

Client. Org and Session info.92/461 Figure 13: System. Preferences .

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.Do not create a new client in this window. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. joe. • SMTPHost: The host name of the Mail Server for this client with SMTP services to send mail. The ID range is on a per table basis. Please note that the ID range is NOT enforced.g.000-999. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record.Please note that the ID range is NOT enforced.999.000 for client data. 13. The standard rages are 0-899.999 but can easily be extended. alerts and escalation are sent from this email address as well as delivery information if the sales rep does not have an email account. you will not be abl • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • RequestEMail: EMails for requests.means that the data in this system is not replicated to other systems . • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. and IMAP to process incoming mail. The standard system limit is 9.com) and should be a valid address. C Order).¡BR¿Merge means that the d • IDRangeStart: The ID Range allows to restrict the range of the internally used IDs.999 for the Application Dictionary 900.smith@company.999.g. 93/461 .2 AD Client The Client Definition Tab defines a unique client. If you create a new client here. If you leave the search key empty. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName.999 for Application Dictionary customizations/extensions and ¿ 1. The address must be filly qualified (e. • IDRangeEnd: The ID Range allows to restrict the range of the internally used IDs. You cannot share data between Clients. but use Initial Client Setup (System Administrator Role) to set up the required security and access rules. the system automatically creates a numeric number.000. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.

passwords.. • WebParam1: The parameter could be used in the JSP page for variables like logos. If authentification is required and no user name and password is required. URLs or entire HTML blocks. The access is via ctx.webParam3 • WebParam4: The parameter could be used in the JSP page for variables like logos. passwords. Required. The access is via ctx. . URLs or entire HTML blocks.).. URLs or entire HTML blocks. Payment Terms. Requires IMAP services. if your mail server requires authentification as well as for processing incoming mails.¡BR¿Please note. alerts and escalation are sent from this email address as well as delivery information if the sales rep does not have an email account.• RequestUser: EMail user name for requests. If left empty the default mailbox (INBOX) will be used. users are required to define their email user name and password. The access is via ctx.webParam1 • WebParam2: The parameter could be used in the JSP page for variables like logos. passwords. • DocumentDir: Directory to store documents by the application server. • RequestUserPW: Password of the user name (ID) for mail processing • RequestFolder: Email folder used to read emails to process as requests. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • WebDir: The Web Directory defines the look and feel for the Web interface.webParam2 • WebParam3: The parameter could be used in the JSP page for variables like logos. that the base language is always English. The access is via ctx. • IsSmtpAuthorization: Some email servers require authentification before sending emails. delivery will fail. If yes.webParam4 94/461 . • IsMultiLingualDocument: If selected. you enable multi lingual documents and need to maintain translations for entities used in documents (examples: Products. The path/directory is accessed by the application server and may not be accessible to clients. URLs or entire HTML blocks. passwords.

For example you may need a standard calendar that runs from Jan 1 to Dec 31 and a fiscal calendar that runs from July 1 to June 30. • C Calendar ID: The Calendar uniquely identifies an accounting calendar. URLs or entire HTML blocks. The accounting rules and high level defaults are defined here. currency and calendar. 95/461 .webParam5 13. If not selected the total invoice amount is used to calculate the payment discount.• WebOrderEMail: When processig a web order. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • C AcctSchema1 ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used accounting such as costing method. currency and calendar. passwords.by default in the header. Multiple calendars can be used.g. the tax and charge amounts are not included. The access is via ctx. URLs or entire HTML blocks. business practice in the US. • C AcctSchema2 ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. The access is via ctx.3 AD ClientInfo The Client Info Tab defines the details for each client. This is e. a confirmation is sent to the EMail addess of the customer from the request EMail address copying this email address when entered. The Calendar is used to determine if a period is open or closed.webParam6 • WebParam5: The parameter could be used in the JSP page for variables like logos. • Acct2 Active: The Second Accounting Schema indicates an alternate set of rules to use for generating reports. • IsDiscountLineAmt: If the payment discount is calculated from line amounts only. • WebParam6: The parameter could be used in the JSP page for variables like logos. passwords. • WebInfo: Display HTML Info in the Web Store .

• Acct3 Active: The Third Accounting Schema indicates an alternate set of rules to use for generating reports. • C AcctSchema3 ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method, currency and calendar • C UOM Volume ID: The Standard UOM for Volume indicates the UOM to use for products referenced by volume in a document. • C UOM Weight ID: The Standard UOM for Weight indicates the UOM to use for products referenced by weight in a document. • C UOM Length ID: The Standard UOM for Length indicates the UOM to use for products referenced by length in a document. • C UOM Time ID: The Standard UOM for Time indicates the UOM to use for products referenced by time in a document. • AD Tree Menu ID: Tree Menu • AD Tree Org ID: Organization Tree • AD Tree BPartner ID: Business Partner Tree • AD Tree Project ID: Project Tree • AD Tree SalesRegion ID: • AD Tree Product ID: Product Tree • M ProductFreight ID: • C BPartnerCashTrx ID: When creating a new Business Partner from the Business Partner Search Field (right-click: Create), the selected business partner is used as a template, e.g. to define price list, payment terms, etc.

96/461

• PA Goal ID: The Performance Goal indicates what this users performance will be measured against. • M PriceList ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing, margin and cost of items purchased or sold. • AllowNegativeStock: Allow negative stock • Checkorderorg: The checkorderorg identifies the order organization and the business partner organization and makes sure both are the same. • Checkinoutorg: The Checkinoutorg identifies the shipment organization and the business partner organization and makes sure both are the same • Groupacctinvlines: Group Accounting Invoice Lines

13.4

AD Org

The Organization Tab is used to define an Organization. Each Organization has a Key and Name and optionally a Description. When adding a new organization, you must re-login to be able to access the new organization. Please note that you will not be able to create new entities in this window if you have not default set for all mandatory values! • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. If you leave the search key empty, the system automatically creates a numeric number. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName, where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.g. C Order). • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

97/461

• IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. • Upc: Use this field to enter the bar code for the product in any of the bar code symbologies (Codabar, Code 25, Code 39, Code 93, Code 128, UPC (A), UPC (E), EAN-13, EAN-8, ITF, ITF-14, ISBN, ISSN, JAN-13, JAN-8, POSTNET and FIM, MSI/Plessey, and Pharmacode) Custom code. Deprecated

13.5

AD OrgInfo

The Organization Info Tab is used to define an Organization’s address, DUNS number and Tax Identification number • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Location ID: The Location / Address field defines the location of an entity. • DUNS: Used for EDI - For details see www.dnb.com/dunsno/list.htm • TaxID: The Tax ID field identifies the legal Identification number of this Entity. • PA Goal ID: The Performance Goal indicates what this users performance will be measured against. • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This can include Vendor, Customer, Employee or Salesperson • Logo: • Reference Order: Uses Order document number as inout number

98/461

13.6

AD Session

History of Online or Web Sessions • AD Session ID: Online or Web Session Information • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • WebSession: Web Session identifier • Remote Addr: The Remote Address indicates an alternative or external address. • Remote Host: Remote Host • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed.

13.7

AD Preference

Defines preferences (default values) for a user. • AD Preference ID: Personal Preference, a default value that will be used by a user. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Window ID: The Window field identifies a unique Window in the system. • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • Attribute: Attribute name that will take the value. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. If you leave the search key empty, the system automatically creates a numeric number. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName, where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.g. C Order).

99/461

14

Warehouse, Shipper and Freigth

The Warehouse and Locators define each Warehouse, any Locators for that Warehouse and the Accounting parameters to be used for inventory in that Warehouse. The Shipper defines the different shipping providers used by an Organization. Freight Categories are used to calculate the Freight for the Shipper selected.

14.1

M Warehouse

Warehouse defines each Warehouse that is used to store products. • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. If you leave the search key empty, the system automatically creates a numeric number. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName, where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.g. C Order). • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • C Location ID: The Location / Address field defines the location of an entity. • Separator: The Element Separator defines the delimiter printed between elements of the structure • IsShipper: This check indicates if the warehouse is a van that can receive and serve orders. • Shippercode: If warehouse is shipper type this code identifies the terminal in the van.

100/461

101/461 Figure 14: Warehouse, Shipper and Freigth

• FromDocumentNo: If warehouse is shipper type this field is the lowest range for the document numbers used by the terminal. • ToDocumentNo: If warehouse is shipper type this field is the highest range for the document numbers used by the terminal. • LocatorUnitsPerPallet: Custom code. Deprecated • Warehouse Size: Custom code. Deprecated

14.2

M Locator

The Locator defines any Locators for that Warehouse. • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. If you leave the search key empty, the system automatically creates a numeric number. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName, where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.g. C Order). • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. • PriorityNo: The Relative Priority indicates the location to pick from first if an product is stored in more than one location. (0 = highest priority) • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. • X: The X dimension indicates the Aisle a product is located in. • Y: The Y dimension indicates the Bin a product is located in

102/461

• Z: The Z dimension indicates the Level a product is located in. • SizeMultiplier: Custom code. Deprecated • Invoicingtype: How to invoice a locator is being renting Custom code. Deprecated • M Locator Type ID: The ID identifies the unique type for the locator Custom code. Deprecated

14.3

M Warehouse Shipper

This table defines shipper path tracks. Each movil warehouse has a particular track. • M Warehouse Shipper ID: Shipper Warehouse • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This can include Vendor, Customer, Employee or Salesperson • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records

14.4

M Freight

Freight Rates for Shipper • M Freight ID: Freight Rate for Shipper • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Shipper ID: The Shipper is any entity which will provide shipping to or shipping from an Organization.

103/461

• M FreightCategory ID: Freight Categories are used to calculate the Freight for the Shipper selected • ValidFrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range • C Country ID: The Country defines a Country. Each Country must be defined before it can be used in any document. • To Country ID: The To Country indicates the receiving country on a document • C Region ID: The Region identifies a unique Region for this Country. • To Region ID: The To Region indicates the receiving region on a document • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • FreightAmt: The Freight Amount indicates the amount charged for Freight in the document currency. • Freight Unit: It is the unit how the quantity is given. • Isprice: This field indicates if it is a fixed price or it is per unit. • Line Round: How units are rounded for each of the in-out lines. • Qtyfrom: Lowest quantity • Qtyto: Highest quantity • Total Round: How units are rounded for the whole in-out.

104/461

• Line Round: How units are rounded for each of the in-out lines. the system automatically creates a numeric number. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. comment or help about the use of this item. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. You cannot share data between Clients. You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 14. If you leave the search key empty. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.6 M Shipper The Shippers table defines any entity who will provide shipping to or shipping from an Organization.14.g.5 M FreightCategory Freight Categories are used to calculate the Freight for the Shipper selected • M FreightCategory ID: Freight Categories are used to calculate the Freight for the Shipper selected • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. C Order). • Total Round: How units are rounded for the whole in-out. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. 105/461 . • M Shipper ID: The Shipper is any entity which will provide shipping to or shipping from an Organization. • Freight Unit: It is the unit how the quantity is given.

Employee or Salesperson • TrackingURL: The variable @TrackingNo@ in the URL is replaced by the actual tracking number of the shipment. 106/461 . • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. Customer. This can include Vendor.• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.

vendors and employees. Defines Tax Categories for bussines partners. • IsFirstNameOnly: The First Name Only checkbox indicates that only the first name of this contact should print in greetings. • C Greeting ID: The Greeting identifies the greeting to print on correspondence. 15.2 C Greeting Trl This table contains greeting translation to different languages. Business Partner Group allows to define the accounting parameters at a group level. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.1 C Greeting The Greeting table defines the way in which you will address business partners on documents. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. This includes customers. Interest areas can be used for marketing campaigns. Greeting defines a greeting that is then associated with a Business Partner or Business Partner Contact. Interest Areas reflect interest in a topic by a contact. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display 107/461 . The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.15 Business partner Business Partner allows to define any party with whom you transact. These categories are used in order to choose which tax will be applied. 15. Sales Region defines the different regions where you do business. • Greeting: The Greeting indicates what will print on letters sent to a Business Partner.

108/461 Figure 15: Business partner .

the system automatically creates a numeric number. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record.• C Greeting ID: The Greeting identifies the greeting to print on correspondence. 109/461 . The entity could be a customer or/and a vendor or/and an employee.g. Employee defines a Business Partner who is an Employee of this organization. Employee or Salesperson • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. This can include Vendor. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. If the Customer check box is selected then the necessary fields will display. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. Vendor defines a Business Partner that is a Vendor for this Organization. Customer defines a Business Partner who is a customer of this organization. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.3 C BPartner The Business Partner table defines any entity with whom an organization transacts. Customer. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. You cannot share data between Clients. • Greeting: The Greeting indicates what will print on letters sent to a Business Partner. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. If the Vendor check box is selected the necessary fields will display. If the Employee is also a Sales Representative then the check box should be selected. If you leave the search key empty. C Order). 15.

• IsSalesRep: The Sales Rep checkbox indicates if this employee is also a sales representative. If it is select additional fields will display which further define this customer. • C BP Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners. • ReferenceNo: The reference number can be printed on orders and invoices to allow your business partner to faster identify your records. • IsCustomer: The Customer checkbox indicates if this Business Partner is a customer. • DUNS: Used for EDI . • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display 110/461 . Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. • IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. If it is selected.• Name2: Additional Name • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. additional fields will display which further identify this vendor.htm • URL: The URL defines an online address for this Business Partner. If it is selected. • IsOneTime: • IsProspect: The Prospect checkbox indicates an entity that is an active prospect or customer.com/dunsno/list. • IsVendor: The Vendor checkbox indicates if this Business Partner is a Vendor. additional fields will display which further identify this employee.dnb. • IsEmployee: The Employee checkbox indicates if this Business Partner is an Employee.For details see www.

• C InvoiceSchedule ID: The Invoice Schedule identifies the frequency used when generating invoices. For this. the exempt tax rate is used. 111/461 . so that you can track tax exempt transactions. • PotentialLifeTimeValue: The Potential Life Time Value is the anticipated revenue to be generated by this Business Partner. • NumberEmployees: Indicates the number of employees for this Business Partner. • PaymentRule: The Payment Rule indicates the method of invoice payment.• TaxID: The Tax ID field identifies the legal Identification number of this Entity. • FirstSale: The First Sale Date identifies the date of the first sale to this Business Partner • AcqusitionCost: The Acquisition Cost identifies the cost associated with making this prospect a customer. • ShareOfCustomer: The Share indicates the percentage of this Business Partner’s volume of the products supplied. This is required for tax reporting. • Rating: The Rating is used to differentiate the importance • SalesVolume: The Sales Volume indicates the total volume of sales for a Business Partner. • IsTaxExempt: If a business partner is exempt from tax. • ActualLifeTimeValue: The Actual Life Time Value is the recorded revenue to be generated by this Business Partner. This field displays only for Prospects. • NAICS: The NAICS/SIC identifies either of these codes that may be applicable to this Business Partner. you need to set up a tax rate with a 0% rate and indicate that this is your tax exempt rate.

• C PaymentTerm ID: Payment Terms identify the method and timing of payment for this transaction. • POReference: The business partner order reference is the order reference for this specific transaction. If this is exceeded a warning message will be generated. • PO DiscountSchema ID: 112/461 . • PO PriceList ID: Identifies the price list used by a Vendor for products purchased by this organization. • PaymentRulePO: The Payment Rule indicates the method of purchase payment. margin and cost of items purchased or sold. • SO Description: The Order Description identifies the standard description to use on orders for this Customer. Often Purchase Order numbers are given to print on Invoices for easier reference. • SO CreditUsed: The Credit Used indicates the total amount of open or unpaid invoices for this Business Partner. the trade discount percentage is calculated and applied resulting in the final price. • C Dunning ID: The Dunning indicates the rules and method of dunning for past due payments.• SO CreditLimit: The Credit Limit indicates the total amount allowed ’on account’. • IsDiscountPrinted: The Discount Printed Checkbox indicates if the discount will be printed on the document. A standard number can be defined in the Business Partner (Customer) window. • M DiscountSchema ID: After calculation of the (standard) price. • M PriceList ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing.

• SOCreditStatus: For Documentation only Not implemented yet • AD Forced Org ID: An organization is a unit of your client or legal entity . department. • SendEMail: Send emails with document attached (e. • FreightCostRule: The Freight Cost Rule indicates the method used when charging for freight. will the order be picked up or shipped.g. • SalesRep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region. You can share data between organizations. For example. Invoice. Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user. • C Greeting ID: The Greeting identifies the greeting to print on correspondence. when a line is complete or as the products become available.examples are store. Not implemented yet • Invoice PrintFormat ID: You need to define a Print Format to print the document. For example should the order be delivered when the entire order is complete. • DocumentCopies: The Document Copies indicates the number of copies of each document that will be generated. 113/461 . • InvoiceRule: The Invoice Rule defines how a Business Partner is invoiced and the frequency of invoicing. • DeliveryViaRule: The Delivery Via indicates how the products should be delivered. Delivery Note. • DeliveryRule: The Delivery Rule indicates when an order should be delivered.• PO PaymentTerm ID: The PO Payment Term indicates the payment term that will be used when this purchase order becomes an invoice.) • BPartner Parent ID: The parent (organization) of the Business Partner for reporting purposes. etc.

-Invoice location (BillTo ID) 5. • Fixmonthday3: The Fix Month Day indicates the day of the month that invoices are due.-Transaction organization (AD OrgTrx ID) 14. This field is displayed only when the fixed due date checkbox is selected.-User defined 2 (User2) For example.-User defined 1 (User1) 15. This field is displayed only when the fixed due date checkbox is selected. This field is displayed only when the fixed due date checkbox is selected. Custom code. if you want to create different invoices for each ship location for a customer.-Order organization (AD Org ID) 2.-Ship location (C BPartner Location ID) 6. 3 different fix month days can be defined.-Project (C Project ID) 12. Deprecated • ShowPriceInOrder: When not checked prices are not shown (left blank) in the printed order document • Invoicegrouping: For scheduled invoicing. 114/461 .-Currency (C Currency ID) 10.-Shipment (M InOut ID) 4. break into different invoices if the related values are different. The value is used as a binary code with 15 digits: 1.-Payment rule (PaymentRule) 8. use the value By ship location (000010000000000) • Fixmonthday: The Fix Month Day indicates the day of the month that invoices are due.• M Wh Schedule ID: The warehouse schedule ID identifies a unique schedule for renting locators. 3 different fix month days can be defined. 3 different fix month days can be defined. Deprecated • STORAGEPAYMENTRULE: Custom code.-Order (C Order ID) 3.-Sales representative (SalesRep ID) 7. • FixMonthDay2: The Fix Month Day indicates the day of the month that invoices are due.-Campaign (C Campaign ID) 11.-Activity (C Activity ID) 13.-Payment term (C PaymentTerm ID) 9.

• SO Bankaccount ID: Default Customer Bankaccount • SO Bp Taxcategory ID: Bussines Partner Tax Category is a category defined for apply default taxes for sales transactions. 3 different Fix Month Days can be defined. • PO Bankaccount ID: Default Vendor Bank Account • PO Fixmonthday: The Fix Month Day for Purchases indicates the day of the month that invoices are due. Deprecated • Isworker: Custom code. Code 25. ITF-14. Code 93. • Last Days: This field is used Copy Lines From in Order tab to specify the consumptions made in the last n days. This field only displays if the fixed due date checkbox is selected. Deprecated • Managers: Custom code. 115/461 . JAN-8. Code 39. MSI/Plessey. This field only displays if the fixed due date checkbox is selected. • PO Bp Taxcategory ID: PO Bussines Partner Tax Category is a category defined for apply default taxes for procurement transactions. ITF. ISBN. UPC (E). This field only displays if the fixed due date checkbox is selected. EAN-13. • PO Fixmonthday3: The Fix Month Day for Purchases indicates the day of the month that invoices are due. POSTNET and FIM. • PO Fixmonthday2: The Fix Month Day for Purchases indicates the day of the month that invoices are due. 3 different Fix Month Days can be defined. EAN-8. 3 different Fix Month Days can be defined.• Ismanager: Custom code. JAN-13. and Pharmacode) • Invoice Printformat: You need to define a Print Format to print the document. UPC (A). ISSN. Code 128. Deprecated • UPC: Use this field to enter the bar code for the product in any of the bar code symbologies (Codabar.

• C Salary Category ID: Indicates a salary category 15. 116/461 . • IsPayFrom: The Pay From Address checkbox indicates if this location is the address the Business Partner pays from. • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Phone: The Phone field identifies a telephone number • Phone2: The 2nd Phone field identifies an alternate telephone number. A business partner may have multiple location records. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • IsRemitTo: The Remit to Address checkbox indicates if this location is the address to which we should send payments to this Business Partner. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.4 C BPartner Location The Location defines the physical location of a business partner. • Fax: The Fax identifies a facsimile number for this Business Partner or Location • ISDN: The ISDN identifies a ISDN or Modem line number. • IsBillTo: The Bill to Address checkbox indicates if this location is the Bill to Address for this Business Partner • IsShipTo: The Ship to Address checkbox indicates if this location is the address to use when shipping orders to this Business Partner.

EAN-8. You cannot share data between Clients. Customer. JAN-13. MSI/Plessey. ISSN. POSTNET and FIM. • C SalesRegion ID: The Sales Region indicates a specific area of sales coverage. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • UPC: Use this field to enter the bar code for the product in any of the bar code symbologies (Codabar. JAN-8. 117/461 . UPC (A). and Pharmacode) 15. ITF. If you leave the search key empty. Fiscal addresses are shown in all documents. Code 128. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. Code 25.5 C SalesRegion The Sales Region defines the different regions where you do business. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. C Order). • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. This can include Vendor. Sales Regions can be used when generating reports or calculating commissions. Code 93. UPC (E). EAN-13.• C SalesRegion ID: The Sales Region indicates a specific area of sales coverage. ISBN. the system automatically creates a numeric number. Employee or Salesperson • C Location ID: The Location / Address field defines the location of an entity. • IsTaxLocation: This fieldindicates that this location is a fiscal address. ITF-14. Code 39.g. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName.

If you leave the search key empty. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • SalesRep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region. • C BP Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners.6 C BP Group The Business Partner Group allows for the association of business partners for reporting and accounting defaults. These categories are used in order to choose which tax will be applied. Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. 15. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. C Order). 118/461 . Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. 15.• IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node.g. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record.7 C BP TaxCategory Defines Tax Categories for bussines partners. the system automatically creates a numeric number. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

• AccountNo: The Account Number indicates the Number assigned to this account 119/461 . • BankAccountType: The Bank Account Type field indicates the type of account (savings. • C BP BankAccount ID: The Partner Bank Account identifies the bank account to be used for this Business Partner • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. This data is used for processing payments and remittances. • RoutingNo: The Bank Routing Number (ABA Number) identifies a legal Bank. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Employee or Salesperson • C Bank ID: The Bank is a unique identifier of a Bank for this Organization or for a Business Partner with whom this Organization transacts. You cannot share data between Clients. This can include Vendor. • IsACH: The ACH checkbox indicates if this Bank Account accepts ACH transactions. It is used in routing checks and electronic transactions. Customer. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 15.8 C BP BankAccount The Define Bank Account Tab defines the banking information for this business partner.• C BP TaxCategory ID: Bussines Partner Tax Category is a category defined for apply default taxes for procurement transactions. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. You cannot share data between Clients. checking etc) this account is defined as.

• R AvsZip: The Zip Verified indicates if the zip code has been verified by the Credit Card Company. • A City: The Account City indicates the City of the Credit Card or Account holder • A State: The State of the Credit Card or Account holder • A Zip: The Zip Code of the Credit Card or Account Holder. MC. • CreditCardVV: The Credit Card Verification indicates the verification code on the credit card (AMEX 4 digits on front. • A Street: The Street Address of the Credit Card or Account holder. • A Name: The Name of the Credit Card or Account holder.• CreditCardType: The Credit Card drop down list box is used for selecting the type of Credit Card presented for payment. • A Ident DL: The Driver’s License being used as identification. • A Ident SSN: The Social Security number being used as identification. • R AvsAddr: The Address Verified indicates if the address has been verified by the Credit Card Company. without blanks or spaces. • CreditCardExpYY: The Expiry Year indicates the expiry year for this credit card. • A EMail: The EMail Address indicates the EMail address off the Credit Card or Account holder.Visa 3 digits back) • CreditCardExpMM: The Expiry Month indicates the expiry month for this credit card. 120/461 . • CreditCardNumber: The Credit Card number indicates the number on the credit card.

• Email: The Email Address is the Electronic Mail ID for this User and should be fully qualified (e. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.smith@company. Passwords are required to identify authorized users. • PA Goal ID: The Performance Goal indicates what this users performance will be measured against. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system.• A Country: Account Country Name • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • Bank Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 121/461 . • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.g.com). This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Supervisor ID: The Supervisor indicates who will be used for forwarding and escalating issues for this user. • Password: The Password indicates the Password for this User Id.9 AD User The User Tab defines the log in for Users who have access to the system. 15. joe. The User identifies a unique user in the system.

• Title: The Title indicates the name that an entity is referred to as. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. Employee or Salesperson • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. This can include Vendor. • Comments: The Comments field allows for free form entry of additional information. • Fax: The Fax identifies a facsimile number for this Business Partner or Location • LastContact: The Last Contact indicates the date that this Business Partner Contact was last contacted. • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • C Greeting ID: The Greeting identifies the greeting to print on correspondence. • LastResult: The Last Result identifies the result of the last contact made. • Phone: The Phone field identifies a telephone number • Phone2: The 2nd Phone field identifies an alternate telephone number. Required if the mail server requires authentification to send emails.• PA GoalPrivate ID: The Personal Goals displays goals that a user will set for themselves. Customer. • Birthday: Birthday or Anniversary day 122/461 . • EmailUser: The user name in the mail system is usually the string before the @ of your email address. • EmailUserPW: Required if the mail server requires authentification to send emails.

11 R ContactInterest Interest Area can be used for Marketing Campaigns The subscription is used to follow up the contacts which are subscribed to an specific area of interest and also add new subscribers. Interest areas can be used for marketing campaigns. • IsSelfService: Self-Service allows users to enter data or update their data. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The flag indicates. • R InterestArea ID: Interest Areas reflect interest in a topic by a contact. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 123/461 . Interest areas can be used for marketing campaigns. that this record was entered or created via Self-Service or that the user can change it via the Self-Service functionality. 15. with centralized services. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.• AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. You cannot share data between Clients. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. and inter-organization transactions. Not implemented yet • Firstname: First Name of the contact • Lastname: Last name of the contact • UserName: Name that identifies the user in the System 15.10 R InterestArea Interest Areas reflect interest in a topic by a contact.

• R InterestArea ID: Interest Areas reflect interest in a topic by a contact. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact 124/461 . Interest areas can be used for marketing campaigns. You cannot share data between Clients. • SubscribeDate: Date the contact subscribe the interest area • OptOutDate: If the field has a date. the customer opted out (unsubscribed) and cannot receive mails for the Interest Area • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system.

You cannot share data between Clients. • AfterDelivery: The After Delivery checkbox indicates that payment is due after delivery as opposed to after invoicing. • DocumentNote: The Document Note is used for recording any additional information regarding this product. 16.16 Payment term Payment Terms defines the different payment terms that you offer your customers and that are offered to you by your vendors. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • NetDays: Indicates the number of days after invoice date that payment is due. • GraceDays: The Grace Days indicates the number of days after the due date to send the first dunning letter.1 C PaymentTerm The Payment Term defines the different payments terms that you offer to your Business Partners when paying invoices and also those terms which your Vendors offer you for payment of your invoices. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. This field displays only if the send dunning letters checkbox has been selected. On the standard invoice. 125/461 . • IsDueFixed: The Fixed Due Date checkbox indicates if invoices using this payment term will be due on a fixed day of the month. the Name and the Document Note • C PaymentTerm ID: Payment Terms identify the method and timing of payment for this transaction. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

126/461 Figure 16: Payment term .

• Discount: The Discount indicates the discount applied or taken as a percentage. • IsValid: The element passed the validation check 127/461 . C Order). • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • IsNextBusinessDay: The Next Business Day checkbox indicates that payment is due on the next business day after invoice or delivery. • NetDay: When defined. the system automatically creates a numeric number. • DiscountDays2: The Discount Days indicates the number of days that payment must be received in to be eligible for the stated discount. This field is displayed only when the fixed due date checkbox is selected. • FixMonthOffset: The Fixed Month Offset indicates the number of months from the current month to indicate an invoice is due. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. • Discount2: The Discount indicates the discount applied or taken as a percentage. A 0 indicates the same month.• FixMonthCutoff: The Fix Month Cutoff indicates the last day invoices can have to be included in the current due date. overwrites the number of net days with the relative number of days to the the day defined. • DiscountDays: The Discount Days indicates the number of days that payment must be received in to be eligible for the stated discount. If you leave the search key empty. a 1 the following month. 3 different fix month days can be defined. • FixMonthDay: The Fix Month Day indicates the day of the month that invoices are due.g. This field will only display if the fixed due date checkbox is selected. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. This field only displays when the fixed due date checkbox has been selected.

You cannot share data between Clients. • C Paymentterm ID: Payment Terms identify the method and timing of payment for this transaction.2 C Paymenttermline Line in a Pyament Term • C Paymenttermline ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Netdays: Indicates the number of days after invoice date that payment is due.• FixMonthDay2: The Fix Month Day indicates the day of the month that invoices are due. • Fixmonthday3: The Fix Month Day indicates the day of the month that invoices are due. 3 different fix month days can be defined. • Percentage: Percentage of an amount (up to 100) • Onremainder: • Excludetax: • Paymentrule: The Payment Rule indicates the method of invoice payment. • Isduefixed: The Fixed Due Date checkbox indicates if invoices using this payment term will be due on a fixed day of the month. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. 16. 128/461 . • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. 3 different fix month days can be defined. This field is displayed only when the fixed due date checkbox is selected. This field is displayed only when the fixed due date checkbox is selected.

• FixMonthDay2: The Fix Month Day indicates the day of the month that invoices are due. • Fixmonthoffset: The Fixed Month Offset indicates the number of months from the current month to indicate an invoice is due. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Netday: When defined. • Isnextbusinessday: The Next Business Day checkbox indicates that payment is due on the next business day after invoice or delivery. • Fixmonthday: The Fix Month Day indicates the day of the month that invoices are due. a 1 the following month. 3 different fix month days can be defined. This field will only display if the fixed due date checkbox is selected. This field only displays when the fixed due date checkbox has been selected. 3 different fix month days can be defined. 3 different fix month days can be defined. 129/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. • Fixmonthday3: The Fix Month Day indicates the day of the month that invoices are due. This field is displayed only when the fixed due date checkbox is selected.• Fixmonthcutoff: The Fix Month Cutoff indicates the last day invoices can have to be included in the current due date. overwrites the number of net days with the relative number of days to the the day defined. This field is displayed only when the fixed due date checkbox is selected. This field is displayed only when the fixed due date checkbox is selected. 16.3 C PaymentTerm Trl The translation defines the payment terms translations for different languages • C PaymentTerm ID: Payment Terms identify the method and timing of payment for this transaction. A 0 indicates the same month.

• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 130/461 .• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • DocumentNote: The Document Note is used for recording any additional information regarding this product. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated.

JAN-13. The Location is the default location when receiving the stored products. ITF-14. JAN-8. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.17 Product Product Category defines different groups of products. Update Name. Code 93.g. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Code 128. 17. 131/461 . ISBN. Vendor Details displays and maintains all products for a selected Vendor. ISSN. POSTNET and FIM. EAN-8. used in the manufacture of products sold to customers and products purchased by an organization. C Order). Unit of Measure. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.1 M Product Defines each product and identifies it for use in price lists and orders. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. EAN-13. Product defines all products used by an organization. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients. UPC (E). These products include those sold to customers. Code 39. Maintain your Resources. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. MSI/Plessey. • DocumentNote: The Document Note is used for recording any additional information regarding this product. in the Resource and don’t change it in the product. etc. If you leave the search key empty. comment or help about the use of this item. The product for the resource is automatically created and synchronized. UPC (A). • UPC: Use this field to enter the bar code for the product in any of the bar code symbologies (Codabar. ITF. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. the system automatically creates a numeric number. Code 25.

132/461 Figure 17: Product .

• IsPickListPrintDetails: The Print Details on Pick List indicates that the BOM element products will print on the Pick List as opposed to this product. • IsBOM: The Bill of Materials check box indicates if this product consists of a bill of materials.and Pharmacode) • SKU: The SKU indicates a user defined stock keeping unit. This is used for products that consist of a bill of materials • C RevenueRecognition ID: The Revenue Recognition indicates how revenue will be recognized for this product 133/461 . • IsSold: The Sold check box indicates if this product is sold by this organization. • IsStocked: The Stocked check box indicates if this product is stocked by this Organization. Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user. • IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. • IsVerified: The Verified check box indicates if the configuration of this product has been verified. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • SalesRep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region. It may be used for an additional bar code symbols or your own schema. • IsPurchased: The Purchased check box indicates if this product is purchased by this organization. • IsInvoicePrintDetails: The Print Details on Invoice indicates that the BOM element products will print on the Invoice as opposed to this product.

• C TaxCategory ID: The Tax Category provides a method of grouping similar taxes. For example.• M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. • S Resource ID: The ID identifies a unique resource Not implemented yet • Discontinued: The Discontinued check box indicates a product that has been discontinued. • Classification: The Classification can be used to optionally group products. Product categories are used for pricing. • Volume: The Volume indicates the volume of the product in the Volume UOM of the Client • Weight: The Weight indicates the weight of the product in the Weight UOM of the Client • ShelfWidth: The Shelf Width indicates the width dimension required on a shelf for a product • ShelfHeight: The Shelf Height indicates the height dimension required on a shelf for a product • ShelfDepth: The Shelf Depth indicates the depth dimension required on a shelf for a product • UnitsPerPallet: The Units per Pallet indicates the number of units of this product which fit on a pallet. 134/461 . • DiscontinuedBy: The Discontinued By indicates the individual who discontinued this product • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. Sales Tax or Value Added Tax.

jpeg or png. but retrieved at runtime. • ImageURL: URL of image. otherwise the guarantee date is calculated by adding the days to the delivery date. • AD Image ID: Defines a system image • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. 135/461 . The image is not stored in the database.• S ExpenseType ID: Expense report type • ProductType: The type of product also determines accounting consequences. Employee or Salesperson • Ispriceprinted: It allows you to print or not the price of a product in a document so you can summary many products in just one. The image can be a gif. • R MailText ID: The Mail Template indicates the mail template for return messages. You need to define a Attribute Set if you want to enable Serial and Lot Number tracking. there is no limit to the availability or guarantee. • VersionNo: Version Number Not implemented yet • M AttributeSet ID: Define Product Attribute Sets to add additional attributes and values to the product. • DescriptionURL: URL for the description • GuaranteeDays: If the value is 0. Customer. This can include Vendor. • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • DownloadURL: Semicolon separated list of URLs to be downloaded or distributed • M FreightCategory ID: Freight Categories are used to calculate the Freight for the Shipper selected • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located.

Deprecated • Calculated: Indicates that the record has been calculated. • MA Producttype ID: • Production: A product that is used for production plans 17. Deprecated • Greenpoint Uom: Custom code. Product categories are used for pricing. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. 136/461 . • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.• Name2: Additional Name • Costtype: Different types of cost • Coststd: The value of the standard cost • Stock Min: Minimum stock of a product Not implemented yet • Enforce Attribute: For differing the stock of a product by the attribute Not implemented yet • Bundle Uom: Custom code. Deprecated • Upc2: Custom code. Product categories can be used in building price lists. • MA Processplan ID: Indicates a process plan.2 M Product Category The Product Category defines unique groupings of products.

• IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value.• Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. You cannot share data between Clients. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 17. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. assets are created when delivering the asset. 137/461 . If an asset group is selected in the product category. the system automatically creates a numeric number.3 M Substitute The Substitute Tab defines products which may be used as a replacement for the selected product. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • PlannedMargin: The Planned Margin Percentage indicates the anticipated margin percentage for this project or project line • A Asset Group ID: The group of assets determines default accounts. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Substitute ID: The Substitute identifies the product to be used as a substitute for this product.g. If you leave the search key empty. C Order). where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.

• BOMQty: The BOM Quantity indicates the quantity of the product in its Unit of Measure (multiplication) • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.17. • M ProductBOM ID: The BOM Product identifies an element that is part of this Bill of Materials. • BOMType: Type of Bill of Materials 17.4 M Product BOM The Bill of Materials defines those products that are generated from other products. A Bill of Material (BOM) is one or more Products or BOMs. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.The available quantity of a no • M Product BOM ID: The Bill of Materials defines each product that are generated from other products.Stored BOMs have to be created via Production .5 M Product Customer Asigns products to customers • M Product Customer ID: Product assignation to customer 138/461 . Available Quantity: .

• M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. and Pharmacode) • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. ITF-14. JAN-8. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. Code 25.6 M Product Org Defines details for a product in different organizations. 139/461 . This can include Vendor. EAN-13. Customer. • UPC: Use this field to enter the bar code for the product in any of the bar code symbologies (Codabar. Code 39. ISBN. • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. POSTNET and FIM. JAN-13. • MRP Planningmethod ID: Identifies a method for filtering the input for planning processes. ISSN. Code 93. You cannot share data between Clients. ITF. EAN-8. Code 128.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MRP Planner ID: Identifies a planner of the MRP. • M Product Org ID: Details for a product in different organizations. MSI/Plessey. UPC (E). • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Employee or Salesperson 17. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. UPC (A).

The Product Details allows you to display and maintain all products for a selected Vendor. • Qtystd: Quantity Standard • Qtymax: • Capacity: Capacity per day • Delaymin: Minimun number of days to complete the transaction 17. minimum order quantity) for each product.7 M Product PO The Purchasing defines the pricing and rules ( pack quantity. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. Customer.• Stockmin: Minimun Stock • Qtytype: Quantity Type • Qtymin: Minumun Quantity. UPC. This can include Vendor. Employee or Salesperson • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • IsCurrentVendor: The Current Vendor indicates if prices are used and Product is reordered from this vendor • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record 140/461 . • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. You cannot share data between Clients.

POSTNET and FIM. Code 93. ITF. EAN-13. MSI/Plessey. • Discontinued: The Discontinued check box indicates a product that has been discontinued. JAN-13. and Pharmacode) • VendorCategory: The Vendor Category identifies the category used by the vendor for this product. This allows you to enter future prices for products which will become effective when appropriate. • PriceEffective: The Price Effective indicates the date this price is for. Code 39. ISBN. • VendorProductNo: The Vendor Product Number identifies the number used by the vendor for this product. UPC (A). JAN-8. ISSN. UPC (E). Code 128. EAN-8. • PriceLastPO: The Last PO Price indicates the last price paid (per the purchase order) for this product. • UPC: Use this field to enter the bar code for the product in any of the bar code symbologies (Codabar. • Order Pack: The Order Pack Quantity indicates the number of units in each pack of this product. Code 25.• PriceList: The List Price is the official List Price in the document currency. 141/461 . ITF-14. • DiscontinuedBy: The Discontinued By indicates the individual who discontinued this product • Order Min: The Minimum Order Quantity indicates the smallest quantity of this product which can be ordered. • PriceLastInv: The Last Invoice Price indicates the last price paid (per the invoice) for this product. • PricePO: The PO Price indicates the price for a product per the purchase order.

• M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. • DeliveryTime Promised: The Promised Delivery Time indicates the number of days between the order date and the date that delivery was promised.8 M Replenish The Replenishment defines the type of replenishment quantities. • DeliveryTime Actual: The Actual Delivery Time indicates the number of days elapsed between placing an order and the delivery of the order • QualityRating: The Quality Rating indicates how a vendor is rated (higher number = higher quality) • RoyaltyAmt: Not implemented yet • Manufacturer: Manufacturer • Qtystd: Quantity Standard • Qtytype: Quantity Type • Capacity: Capacity per day 17. This is used for automated ordering. 142/461 .• CostPerOrder: The Cost Per Order indicates the fixed charge levied when an order for this product is placed. You cannot share data between Clients.

• ReplenishType: The Replenish Type indicates if this product will be manually reordered. You cannot share data between Clients. 17. 143/461 .10 M Product UOM Users can define the unit of the order. Customer. • Type Template: Specifies the template type for the product. • M Product Uom Id: Alternative order uom for the product. • Level Max: Indicates the maximum quantity of this product to be stocked in inventory. Can be define as a template for orders. This does not necessarily need to be the unit which is used for the invoice. Employee or Salesperson • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. ordered when the quantity is below the minimum quantity or ordered when it is below the maximum quantity. For instance diskettes are stocked and accounted in units while are bought in boxes of 10. • M Product Template ID: Product template • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. This can include Vendor. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. Using templates is a good way to avoid having to repeat the entry of each line of the order when there are few changes. • Level Min: Indicates the minimum quantity of this product to be stocked in inventory.9 M Product Template The product template is used to configure standard orders for a business partner. 17.

• Datefrom: The Date From indicates the starting date of a range. • Price: The Price indicates the Price for a product or service.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Cumqty: Cumulate quantity.11 M Costing Stores the average costs for purchases and productions • M Costing ID: Average costs for purchases and productions • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. 17. 144/461 . • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. You cannot share data between Clients. You cannot share data between Clients. • Dateto: The Date To indicates the end date of a range (inclusive) • Ismanual: The Manual check box indicates if the process will done manually. • M Inoutline ID: The Shipment/Receipt Line indicates a unique line in a Shipment/Receipt document • C Invoiceline ID: The Invoice Line uniquely identifies a single line of an Invoice.

12 M Product Trl The translation defines the product name for different languages • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. 17. 145/461 .• Costtype: Different types of cost • Ispermanent: • Cost: Cost amount. • M Productionline ID: The Production Line indicates the production document line (if applicable) for this transaction • Isproduction: Sets the record id for production. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • DocumentNote: The Document Note is used for recording any additional information regarding this product. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.

• Breakdown: Indicates if the line order in that unit of mesaure has to be breaken down on the shipment document.g. day. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. It also defines the conversion between units of measure. the shipment document must show eight lines of 1 roll 146/461 . • StdPrecision: The Standard Precision defines the number of decimal places that amounts will be rounded to for accounting transactions and documents. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • X12DE355: The Unit of Measure Code indicates the EDI X12 Code Data Element 355 (Unit or Basis for Measurement) • UOMSymbol: The Symbol identifies the Symbol to be displayed and printed for a Unit of Measure • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. minute.18 Unit of Measure Unit of Measure is used to define non monetary units of measure. E. 18. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. working day. If you order 8 rolls.) if they are not explicitly defined here. You cannot share data between Clients. The system provides some automatic conversions between units of measures (e. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value.g.1 C UOM Unit of Measure defines a non monetary Unit of Measure. hour. • CostingPrecision: The Costing Precision defines the number of decimal places that amounts will be rounded to when performing costing calculations. etc.

147/461 Figure 18: Unit of Measure .

You cannot share data between Clients. etc.g. day. 18. conversion rate and conversion date range. If the Multiply Rate is entered. If you enter a Divide Rate.) if they are not explicitly defined here. minute. You cannot share data between Clients. • UOMSymbol: The Symbol identifies the Symbol to be displayed and printed for a Unit of Measure 148/461 .18.2 C UOM Conversion The Conversion defines the rates for converting a Unit of Measure. the Multiply Rate will be automatically calculated. The system provides some automatic conversions between units of measures (e. then the Divide Rate will be automatically calculated.Conversions need to be dir • C UOM Conversion ID: The UOM Conversion identifies a unique to and from Unit of Measure. hour. • MultiplyRate: To convert Source number to Target number. working day. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • C UOM To ID: The UOM To indicates the destination UOM for a UOM Conversion pair. the Source is divided by the divide rate. the Source is multiplied by the multiply rate.3 C UOM Trl Unit of Measure translations to different languages • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • DivideRate: To convert Source number to Target number. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

149/461 . The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated.

If you have multiple attributes and want to search under a common sttribute. If not selected.like the individual Serial or Lot Numbers or Guarantee Date of a product instance.M. If it is an Instance Attribute. Size • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Example: have one Size search attribute combining the values of all different sizes (Size for Dress Shirt XL. etc. This eases the maintenance of the individual product attribute. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.g. all instances of the product share the attribute (e. • M Attribute ID: Product Attribute like Color.19 Attribute Define Product Attribute Sets to add additional attributes and values to the product. Size. all products have the same value. 19. • IsList: If the attribute has a predefined list of values. You need to define a Attribute Set if you want to enable Serial and Lot Number tracking. The Attribute Search allows you to have all values available for selection. You cannot share data between Clients. Size. Size for T-Shirts: S. color=green).g. • M AttributeSearch ID: Attributes are specific to a Product Attribute Set (e.XS). the individual instance of the product has this attribute . • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. etc.M. Otherwise you can enter the attribute value manually. 150/461 .S. you can select it by choosing one of the valid values.L).1 M Attribute Product Attribute like Color. • IsInstanceAttribute: If selected. Product Attribute like Color. you define a search sttribute. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.L. • IsMandatory: The Mandatory checkbox indicates if the field is required for a record to be save to the database.

151/461 Figure 19: Attribute .

. green.19. • IsSerNo: For individual products. large. You cannot share data between Clients. you can define Lot Numbers • M LotCtl ID: Definition to create Lot numbers for Products • IsGuaranteeDate: For individual products. 19.3 M AttributeValue Individual value of a product attribute (e. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.. . You need to define a Attribute Set if you want to enable Serial and Lot Number tracking.2 M AttributeSet Define Product Attribute Sets to add additional attributes and values to the product. . you can define Serial Numbers • M SerNoCtl ID: Definition to create Serial numbers for Products • IsLot: For individual products.g. green. there is no limit to the availability or guarantee. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.) • M AttributeValue ID: Individual value of a product attribute (e. otherwise the guarantee date is calculated by adding the days to the delivery date.) 152/461 . • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. large.g. • M AttributeSet ID: Define Product Attribute Sets to add additional attributes and values to the product. You need to define a Attribute Set if you want to enable Serial and Lot Number tracking. • IsLockable: This check indicates that the product is locked in the warehouse and it cannot be taken out of it. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. you can define a guarantee or expiry date • GuaranteeDays: If the value is 0.

• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records 19.5 M AttributeSetInstance Values for a individual instance of attributes • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes 153/461 . where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. Size • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. If you leave the search key empty.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 19.4 M AttributeUse Attributes and Attribute Values used for the product • M Attribute ID: Product Attribute like Color.g. C Order). The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. You cannot share data between Clients. You need to define a Attribute Set if you want to enable Serial and Lot Number tracking. • M Attribute ID: Product Attribute like Color. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. the system automatically creates a numeric number. Size • M AttributeSet ID: Define Product Attribute Sets to add additional attributes and values to the product.

g. warranted product. green. You need to define a Attribute Set if you want to enable Serial and Lot Number tracking. It can only be used when the quantity is 1. . You cannot share data between Clients. Size • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. If you leave the search key empty.) • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • M Lot ID: The individual Lot of a Product 19. large. You cannot share data between Clients. • M AttributeValue ID: Individual value of a product attribute (e. C Order). • GuaranteeDate: Date when the normal guarantee or availability expires • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • M Attribute ID: Product Attribute like Color. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. 154/461 .6 M AttributeInstance Each of the values that an attribute has been set to. • M AttributeSet ID: Define Product Attribute Sets to add additional attributes and values to the product.. the system automatically creates a numeric number. • Lot: The Lot Number indicates the specific lot that a product was part of. • SerNo: The Serial Number identifies a tracked. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName.g.

• IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. products. • M PriceList ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.1 M PriceList Price lists determine currency of the document as well as tax treatment. 20. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record 155/461 . This is also known as the gross price. partners groups and product categories. • BasePriceList ID: The Base Price List identifies the default price list to be used if a product is not found on the selected price list Not implemented yet • IsTaxIncluded: The Tax Included checkbox indicates if the prices include tax. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Different price adjustments can be configured for business partners. • IsSOPriceList: The Sales Price List check box indicates if this price list is used for sales transactions. margin and cost of items purchased or sold. You cannot share data between Clients. Price lists determine currency and tax treatment. Price list versions allow to maintain parallel lists for different date ranges. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.20 Pricing Trade discount schema calculates the trade discount percentage Price List generates product price lists for your Business Partners.

156/461 Figure 20: Pricing .

2 M PriceList Version Price lists are automatically created based on Product Purchasing Information and the Vendor Category Discount. margin and cost of items purchased or sold. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.• EnforcePriceLimit: The Enforce Price Limit check box indicates that prices cannot be below the limit price in Orders. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.The other alternative is to copy them from existing pricelists and the re-calculate them. • ValidFrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range • ProcCreate: • M Pricelist Version Base ID: The Base Price List identifies the Base Pricelist used for calculating prices (the source) • M Pricelist Version Generate: 157/461 .You can also re-calculate the pricelist by referencin • M PriceList Version ID: Each Price List can have multiple versions. 20. • M PriceList ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing. The most common use is to indicate the dates that a Price List is valid for. • M DiscountSchema ID: After calculation of the (standard) price. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Invoices are not checked. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. the trade discount percentage is calculated and applied resulting in the final price.

4 M DiscountSchema Trade discount schema calculates the trade discount percentage • M DiscountSchema ID: After calculation of the (standard) price. • PriceList: The List Price is the official List Price in the document currency.3 M ProductPrice The Pricing displays the List. 158/461 . The Price List displays the prices for a product based on the selected price list. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Standard and Limit prices for each price list a product is contained in. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. The Pricing Tab displays the List. The most common use is to indicate the dates that a Price List is valid for. • M PriceList Version ID: Each Price List can have multiple versions. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.20. Standard and Limit prices for each price list a product is contained in. You cannot share data between Clients. • PriceStd: The Standard Price indicates the standard or normal price for a product on this price list • PriceLimit: The Price Limit indicates the lowest price for a product stated in the Price List Currency. You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 20. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. the trade discount percentage is calculated and applied resulting in the final price.

standard and limit price is calculated. • M DiscountSchema ID: After calculation of the (standard) price.• ValidFrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range Not implemented yet • DiscountType: Type of procedure used to calculate the trade discount percentage Not implemented yet • Script: Use Java language constructs to define the result of the calculation Not implemented yet • FlatDiscount: Not implemented yet • IsQuantityBased: The calculation of the trade discount level is based on the quantity of the order and not the value amount of the order Not implemented yet • CumulativeLevel: Not implemented yet • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. the trade discount percentage is calculated and applied resulting in the final price. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to.The parameters listed here allow to copy and calculate pricelists. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.¡BR¿The calculation:¡UL¿¡LI¿Copy and convert price from referenced price list¡LI¿result plus Surcharge Amount¡L • M DiscountSchemaLine ID: For the Pricelist Discount Type.5 M DiscountSchemaLine Pricelists are created based on Product Purchase and Category Discounts. you enter how the list. Product categories are used for pricing. 159/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. 20.

• List Fixed: Fixes List Price (not calculated) • Std Base: The Standard Price Base indicates the price to use as the basis for the calculation of a new price standard. Customer. If this field contains 0.00 then it is ignored. • List Rounding: The List Price Rounding indicates how the final list price will be rounded.• C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • List MaxAmt: The List Price Max Margin indicates the maximum margin for a product.00 then it is ignored. For example. A negative amount indicates the percentage which will be added to the base price. This can include Vendor. • List Discount: The List Price Discount Percentage indicates the percentage discount which will be subtracted from the base price. This allows you to enter multiple rates for the same currency pair. The conversion rate chosen must include this date in it’s date range • List Base: The List Price Base indicates the price to use as the basis for the calculation of a new price list. • List MinAmt: The List Price Min Margin indicates the minimum margin for a product. The margin is calculated by subtracting the original list price from the newly calculated price. • List AddAmt: The List Price Surcharge Amount indicates the amount to be added to the price prior to multiplication. Employee or Salesperson • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • ConversionRateType: The Conversion Rate Type indicates the type of conversion rate. 160/461 . • ConversionDate: The Conversion Date identifies the date used for currency conversion. The margin is calculated by subtracting the original list price from the newly calculated price. If this field contains 0. one rate may be used for Spot conversions and a different rate for Revaluations.

• Std MaxAmt: The Standard Price Max Margin indicates the maximum margin for a product. • Std Fixed: Fixed Standard Price (not calculated) • Limit Base: Identifies the price to be used as the base for calculating a new price list.00 then it is ignored. A negative amount indicates the percentage which will be added to the base price. The margin is calculated by subtracting the original limit price from the newly calculated price. • Limit MinAmt: Indicates the minimum margin for a product. The margin is calculated by subtracting the original Standard price from the newly calculated price. • Std MinAmt: The Standard Price Min Margin indicates the minimum margin for a product. if negative it will be added to base price • Limit Rounding: A drop down list box which indicates the rounding (if any) will apply to the final prices in this price list. The margin is calculated by subtracting the original Standard price from the newly calculated price. • Std Discount: The Standard Price Discount Percentage indicates the percentage discount which will be subtracted from the base price. If this field contains 0. • Limit AddAmt: Indicates the amount to be added to the Limit price prior to multiplication.00 then it is ignored.• Std AddAmt: The Standard Price Surcharge Amount indicates the amount to be added to the price prior to multiplication. • Std Rounding: The Standard Price Rounding indicates how the final Standard price will be rounded. If this field contains 0. The margin is calculated by subtracting the original limit price from the newly calculated price. 161/461 . • Limit Discount: Indicates the discount in percent to be subtracted from base.00 then it is ignored. If this field contains 0. If this field contains 0.00 then it is ignored. • Limit MaxAmt: Indicates the maximum margin for a product.

The offer can be percentual. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Dateto: The Date To indicates the end date of a range (inclusive) • BPartner Selection: Business Partner Selection Mode is the way Business Partners will be selected. • Fixed: Fixed price for the price adjustment • Datefrom: The Date From indicates the starting date of a range. • BP Group Selection: Defines the way Business Partner Groups will be selected (including or excluding the taken ones) • Product Selection: Defines the way Products will be selected (including or excluding the taken ones) 162/461 . • Addamt: Fixed discount amount • Discount: The Discount indicates the discount applied or taken as a percentage. product categorys and partners groups. • Priority: The Priority indicates the importance of this request.6 M Offer The Price Adjustments has a vigence period and are applicated for the configurated business partners. products. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. fixed or set. You cannot share data between Clients.• Limit Fixed: Fixed Limit Price (not calculated) 20.

• Prod Cat Selection: Defines the way Product Categories will be selected (including or excluding the taken ones) • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Qty From: Quantity From is the minimun amount that the offer will be applied from. • Qty To: Quantity to is the maximun amount to apply the offer. • Pricelist Selection: Defines the way Price Lists will be selected (including or excluding the taken ones)

20.7

M Offer PriceList

Used to select Price Lists for a price adjustment. • M Offer Pricelist ID: Price List selected into a Price Adjustment. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment • M Pricelist ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing, margin and cost of items purchased or sold.

20.8

M Offer BPartner

Used to select the business partners related to the Price Adjustment. • M Offer Bpartner ID: Selected Business Partner in a Price Adjustment • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment

163/461

• C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This can include Vendor, Customer, Employee or Salesperson

20.9

M Offer BP Group

Used to select the groups of business partners related to the price adjustment. • M Offer Bp Group ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment • C Bp Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners.

20.10

M Offer Prod Cat

Used to select the different categories of products related to the Price Adjustments. • M Offer Prod Cat ID: Product Category selected in a Price Adjustment • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. Product categories are used for pricing.

20.11

M Offer Product

Used to select the different products related to the Price Adjustment. • M Offer Product ID: Product selected in a Price Adjustment.

164/461

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.

20.12

C Discount

Defines applicable discounts to the defined prices. • C Discount ID: Discount applicable to prices. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Discount: The Discount indicates the discount applied or taken as a percentage. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.

20.13

C BPartner Discount

Defines the Business Partners the discount can be applied to. • C Bpartner Discount ID: A Business Partner who can be applied the discount to. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This can include Vendor, Customer, Employee or Salesperson

165/461

• C Discount ID: Discount applicable to prices. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • Cascade: Indicates if it is applied in an accumulative way or if it is applied to the base amount. • Iscustomer: The Customer checkbox indicates if this Business Partner is a customer. If it is select additional fields will display which further define this customer. • Isvendor: The Vendor checkbox indicates if this Business Partner is a Vendor. If it is selected, additional fields will display which further identify this vendor.

166/461

21

Tax

Tax Category is used to enter and maintain Tax Categories. Each product is associated with a tax category which facilitates reacting changing tax rates. Tax Rate defines the different taxes used for each tax category.

21.1

C TaxCategory

The Tax Category is used to define and maintain Tax Categories. Each Product is associated with a Tax Category. This facilitates adapting to changes in taxation. • C TaxCategory ID: The Tax Category provides a method of grouping similar taxes. For example, Sales Tax or Value Added Tax. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • CommodityCode: The Commodity Code indicates a code that is used in tax calculations • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value.

21.2

C TaxCategory Trl

Translation for Tax Categories • C TaxCategory ID: The Tax Category provides a method of grouping similar taxes. For example, Sales Tax or Value Added Tax. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.

167/461

168/461 Figure 21: Tax

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated.

21.3

C Tax

The Tax Rate Window defines the different taxes used for each tax category. • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • TaxIndicator: The Tax Indicator identifies the short name that will print on documents referencing this tax. • IsDocumentLevel: If the tax is calculated on document level, all lines with that tax rate are added before calculating the total tax for the document.Otherwise the tax is calculated per line and then added.Due to rounding, the tax amount can differ. • ValidFrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range • IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. • RequiresTaxCertificate: The Requires Tax Certificate indicates that a tax certificate is required for a Business Partner to be tax exempt.

169/461

• Rate: The Rate indicates the percentage to be multiplied by the source to arrive at the tax or exchange amount. • Parent Tax ID: The Parent Tax indicates a tax that is a reference for multiple taxes. This allows you to charge multiple taxes on a document by entering the Parent Tax • C Country ID: The Country defines a Country. Each Country must be defined before it can be used in any document. • C Region ID: The Region identifies a unique Region for this Country. • To Country ID: The To Country indicates the receiving country on a document • To Region ID: The To Region indicates the receiving region on a document • C TaxCategory ID: The Tax Category provides a method of grouping similar taxes. For example, Sales Tax or Value Added Tax. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. • IsTaxExempt: If a business partner is exempt from tax, the exempt tax rate is used. For this, you need to set up a tax rate with a 0% rate and indicate that this is your tax exempt rate. This is required for tax reporting, so that you can track tax exempt transactions. • SOPOType: Sales Tax: charged when selling - examples: Sales Tax, Output VAT (payable)Purchase Tax: tax charged when purchasing - examples: Use Tax, Input VAT (receivable) • Isprinttax: Custom code. Deprecated • C Bp Taxcategory ID: Bussines Partner Tax Category is a category defined for apply default taxes for procurement transactions. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document.

170/461

• Cascade: Indicates if it is applied in an accumulative way or if it is applied to the base amount.

21.4

C Tax Trl

Translations for taxes. • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • TaxIndicator: The Tax Indicator identifies the short name that will print on documents referencing this tax.

21.5

C Tax Zone

Defines the zones where the tax is applicable. • C Tax Zone ID: The tax zone indicates the zone from and the zone to the tax applies. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line.

171/461

Each Country must be defined before it can be used in any document. • From Region ID: The Region identifies a unique Region for this Country.• From Country ID: The Country defines a Country. • TO Country ID: The To Country indicates the receiving country on a document • TO Region ID: The To Region indicates the receiving region on a document 172/461 .

or will enter the Economic Monetary Union. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • StdPrecision: The Standard Precision defines the number of decimal places that amounts will be rounded to for accounting transactions and documents. You cannot share data between Clients.1 C Currency The Currency defines any currency you will transact with or report in. • IsEMUMember: The Emu Member checkbox is used to indicate if this currency is a member of the European Economic Union. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • ISO Code: For details . • IsEuro: The Euro Currency checkbox is used to indicate if this currency is the Euro Currency. • CostingPrecision: The Costing Precision defines the number of decimal places that amounts will be rounded to when performing costing calculations.htm • CurSymbol: The Currency Symbol defines the symbol that will print when this currency is used. • EMUEntryDate: The EMU Entry Date defines the date that this currency entered. 173/461 .org/trade/rec/rec09en.unece.http://www.22 Currency Currency defines any currency which will be used in documents or reporting. Conversion Rates is used to define the conversion rates that will be used when converting document amounts from one currency to another 22.

174/461 Figure 22: Currency .

• IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. 22. 22. 175/461 .• EMURate: The EMU Rate defines the official rate to be used when converting from this currency to the Euro. Conversion rates can be defined for multiple rate types. • CurSymbol: The Currency Symbol defines the symbol that will print when this currency is used. They can also be effective for a defined range of dates. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • C Conversion Rate ID: The Conversion Rate defines the rate (multiply or divide) to use when converting a source currency to an accounting currency.2 C Currency Trl Translations for currencies • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.3 C Conversion Rate The Conversion Rate defines the rates to use when converting a source currency to an accounting or reporting currency. • PricePrecision: Defines the number of decimal positions that the prices are displayed with. The Conversion Rates tab is used to define conversion rates to be used when converting document amounts from one currency to another. You cannot share data between Clients.

one rate may be used for Spot conversions and a different rate for Revaluations. This allows you to enter multiple rates for the same currency pair. then the Divide Rate will be automatically calculated. the Multiply Rate will be automatically calculated. • DivideRate: To convert Source number to Target number. For example. 176/461 . • MultiplyRate: To convert Source number to Target number. the Source is multiplied by the multiply rate.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. If the Multiply Rate is entered. • ValidFrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range • ValidTo: The Valid To date indicates the last day of a date range • ConversionRateType: The Conversion Rate Type indicates the type of conversion rate. If you enter a Divide Rate. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • C Currency ID To: The Currency To defines the target currency for this conversion rate. the Source is divided by the divide rate. You cannot share data between Clients.

This field only appears when the Document Base Type is Sales Order.¡BR¿SO Sub Type of ¡b¿Credit Order¡/b¿ will generate 177/461 .1 C DocType The Document Definition Tab defines the processing parameters and controls for the document. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.23 Document type Document Type defines any document to be used in the system. • DocBaseType: The Document Base Type identifies the base or starting point for a document. The selection made here will determine which documents will be generated when an order is processed and which documents must be generated manually or in batches. ¡BR¿ The ¡b¿Invoice¡/b¿ and ¡b¿Receipt¡/b¿ must be generated via other processes. ¡BR¿SO Sub Type of ¡b¿Warehouse Order¡/b¿ will generate the ¡b¿Order¡/b¿ and ¡b¿Delivery Note¡/b¿. • DocSubTypeSO: The SO Sub Type indicates the type of sales order this document refers to. ¡BR¿The ¡b¿Delivery Note¡/b¿. Multiple document types may share a single document base type. ¡b¿Invoice¡/b¿ and ¡b¿Receipt¡/b¿ must be generated via other processes. The max length is 2000 characters. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • PrintName: The Label to be printed indicates the name that will be printed on a document or correspondence. Each document type provides the basis for processing of each document and controls the printed name and document sequence used. • C DocType ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. ¡BR¿The following outlines this process.¡BR¿SO Sub Type of ¡b¿Standard Order¡/b¿ will generate just the ¡b¿Order¡/b¿ document when the order is processed. 23. You cannot share data between Clients. • IsSOTrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction.

178/461 Figure 23: Document type .

• CreatePicklist: • IsApproved: The Approved checkbox indicates if this document requires approval before it can be processed. • C DocTypeInvoice ID: The Document Type for Invoice indicates the document type that will be used when an invoice is generated from this sales document. A pro forma invoice indicates the amount that will be due should an order be shipped. This field will display only when the base document type is Sales Order and the Pro Forma Invoice checkbox is selected • C DocTypeShipment ID: The Document Type for Shipments indicates the document type that will be used when a shipment is generated from this sales document. • DocNoSequence ID: The Document Sequence indicates the sequencing rule to use for this document type. This field will display only when the base document type is Sales Order. • C Approval ID: The Approval indicates the type of approval. This field will display only when the base document type is Sales Order. ¡b¿Delivery Note¡/b¿ and ¡b¿Invoice¡/b¿.¡BR¿SO Sub Type of ¡b¿POS¡/b¿ (Point of Sale) will generate all document • HasProforma: The Pro Forma Invoice checkbox indicates if pro forma invoices can be generated from this sales document. ¡BR¿ The ¡b¿Reciept¡/b¿ must be generated via other processes. • IsBatched: • IsBatchControlEnforced: 179/461 . This field is displayed only if the Approved checkbox has been selected • IsDocNoControlled: The Document Number Controlled checkbox indicates if this document type will have a sequence number. • C DocTypeProforma ID: The Document Type for Invoice indicates the document type that will be used when an invoice is generated from this sales document.the ¡b¿Order¡/b¿.

If Isorgfiltered=’Y’ Ismaxtable must be equal to ’Y’ This will calculate the correct document number of the organization. • AD PrintFormat ID: The print format determines how data is rendered for print.• IsBatchDocNoControlled: • BatchNoSequence ID: • GL Category ID: The General Ledger Category is an optional. • HasCharges: The Charges checkbox indicates that charges can be added to this document. • DocumentCopies: The Document Copies indicates the number of copies of each document that will be generated. • C Doctype Reversed ID: 180/461 . • DocumentNote: The Document Note is used for recording any additional information regarding this product. • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. A different document number for each organization. Charges can include items like shipping. • Ismaxtable: This field is associated with Isorgfiltered field. This is used to calculate the document number by document type. • IsTransferred: The transferred checkbox indicates if the transactions associated with this document should be transferred to the General Ledger. • IsPrinted: The Printed checkbox indicates if this document or line will included when printing. handling or bank charges. user defined method of grouping journal lines. • Orgfiltered: Filters by organization. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value.

You cannot share data between Clients. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. The max length is 2000 characters. • C DocType ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.2 C DocType Trl The Translation Tab defines a Document Type in an alternate language. 181/461 . The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.23. • DocumentNote: The Document Note is used for recording any additional information regarding this product. • PrintName: The Label to be printed indicates the name that will be printed on a document or correspondence.

• IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.24 Activity. Marketing Campaign defines the start and end date for a campaign. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.1 C Activity Defines tasks that are preformed and in Activity Based Costing.g. the system automatically creates a numeric number. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. 182/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. Marketing Channel defines the different channels used in Marketing Campaigns 24. Campaign and Channel Activity Based Costing defines the different activities for which you want to capture costs. comment or help about the use of this item. It also gives a running balance of the invoice amounts which referred to this campaign. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. If you leave the search key empty. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. C Order).

183/461 Figure 24: Activity. Campaign and Channel .

where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • StartDate: The Start Date indicates the first or starting date of a range. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.2 C Campaign The Marketing Campaign defines the parameters for a Campaign. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. C Order). The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. You cannot share data between Clients.24. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. 184/461 . • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. If you leave the search key empty. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • EndDate: The End Date indicates the last date in this range. Please note that you will not be able to create new entities in this window if you have not default set for all mandatory values! • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. • C Channel ID: The Sales Channel identifies a channel (or method) of sales generation.g. These include a start and end date as well as the amount of any invoices that have been processed which reference this campaign. the system automatically creates a numeric number. • Costs: The Costs indicates the cost of a campaign in an Organizations accounting currency. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record.

185/461 . • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. You cannot share data between Clients.24.3 C Channel The Marketing Channel Tab defines the different methods or processes through which customers are obtained. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • C Channel ID: The Sales Channel identifies a channel (or method) of sales generation.

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Insurance & Freight) CPT (Carriage paid to) CIP (Carriage and Insurance Paid to) • C Incoterms ID: The ID identifies a unique Incoterm • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Requiresdescription: If description is required • Isdelivery: If it has to be delivered 186/461 . Purchase Order defines a purchase order for an organization. ex-mill. who is responsible for loading & unloading of goods. ex-factory. 25. When a Purchase Order has been entered you can generate a Shipment Document or Invoice from this Purchase Order Simple Sales Order is used to trigger orders with minimal data. and characteristics of the goods. ex-warehouse.25 Order Sale Order allows you to enter and modify Sales Orders. quantity. FCA Free carrier (Franco Transportista) FAS (Free alongside ship) FOB (Free on Board) CFR (Cost & Freight) CIF (Cost. This data is completed with defauly values in each type of order. When commercial traders enter into a contract for the purchase and sale of goods they are free to negotiate specific terms of their contract. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. Every international contract will also contain what is referred to as an Incoterm (international commercial term). Incoterms also influence Customs valuation basis of imported merchandise. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. These terms include the price. You cannot share data between Clients. The Incoterm selected by the parties to the transaction will determine which party pays the cost of each segment of transport. and who bears the risk of loss at any given point during a given international shipment.1 C Incoterms EXW Ex-works.

187/461 Figure 25: Order .

If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. C Order). • DocStatus: The Document Status indicates the status of a document at this time. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 188/461 .25. The purchase orders and the sales orders. from Offer to Order or Invoice). If the document is not saved. • C DocType ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules • C DocTypeTarget ID: You can convert document types (e. The options are listed in a popup • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. the system will generate a document number for you. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. • IsSOTrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. If you leave the field empty.2 C Order Table where there are all the orders. use the Document Action field • DocAction: You find the current status in the Document Status field.g. If you want to change the document status.g. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). This processing is initiated by selecting the appropriate Document Action. The conversion is then reflected in the current type. the field is empty if you create a new document. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. You cannot share data between Clients.

• IsTransferred: The transferred checkbox indicates if the transactions associated with this document should be transferred to the General Ledger. Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user. Customer. • IsApproved: The Approved checkbox indicates if this document requires approval before it can be processed. • DatePromised: The Date Promised indicates the date. Employee or Salesperson 189/461 . • DateOrdered: Indicates the Date an item was ordered.• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. that an Order was promised for. • IsCreditApproved: Credit Approved indicates if the credit approval was successful for Orders • IsDelivered: • IsInvoiced: Indicator if invoiced • IsPrinted: The Printed checkbox indicates if this document or line will included when printing. • IsSelected: • SalesRep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region. • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This can include Vendor. • DatePrinted: Indicates the Date that a document was printed. if any.

when a line is complete or as the products become available. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • PaymentRule: The Payment Rule indicates the method of invoice payment. For example. will the order be picked up or shipped.• BillTo ID: The Bill/Invoice To indicates the address to use when remitting bills • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • POReference: The business partner order reference is the order reference for this specific transaction. • InvoiceRule: The Invoice Rule defines how a Business Partner is invoiced and the frequency of invoicing. For example should the order be delivered when the entire order is complete. • DeliveryViaRule: The Delivery Via indicates how the products should be delivered. • FreightCostRule: The Freight Cost Rule indicates the method used when charging for freight. • IsDiscountPrinted: The Discount Printed Checkbox indicates if the discount will be printed on the document. • FreightAmt: The Freight Amount indicates the amount charged for Freight in the document currency. A standard number can be defined in the Business Partner (Customer) window. • DeliveryRule: The Delivery Rule indicates when an order should be delivered. Often Purchase Order numbers are given to print on Invoices for easier reference. • C PaymentTerm ID: Payment Terms identify the method and timing of payment for this transaction. 190/461 .

margin and cost of items purchased or sold. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. Restocking) • ChargeAmt: The Charge Amount indicates the amount for an additional charge. This is also known as the gross price. low) of this document • TotalLines: The Total amount displays the total of all lines in document currency • GrandTotal: The Grand Total displays the total amount including Tax and Freight in document currency • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided.• M Shipper ID: The Shipper is any entity which will provide shipping to or shipping from an Organization. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. • IsTaxIncluded: The Tax Included checkbox indicates if the prices include tax. medium. • PriorityRule: The Priority indicates the importance (high. Shipping. • C Charge ID: The Charge indicates a type of Charge (Handling. Not implemented yet • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines 191/461 . • M PriceList ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing.

Invoice. etc. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment.• SendEMail: Send emails with document attached (e. with centralized services. Delivery Note. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • CopyFrom: Copy record lines • DropShip BPartner ID: • DropShip Location ID: • DropShip User ID: • IsSelfService: Self-Service allows users to enter data or update their data. The flag indicates.) • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization).g. • Deliverynotes: Notes for the delivery • C Incoterms ID: The ID identifies a unique Incoterm • Incotermsdescription: Description of the incoterm • Generatetemplate: A button that copies the products that are defined as template in the business partner window 192/461 . • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. that this record was entered or created via Self-Service or that the user can change it via the Self-Service functionality. • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. and inter-organization transactions.

• DatePromised: The Date Promised indicates the date.• Delivery Location ID: Location where the product will be delivered to 25. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This can include Vendor. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. Employee or Salesperson • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • DateOrdered: Indicates the Date an item was ordered.3 C OrderLine The table defines the individual line items that comprise an Order • C OrderLine ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. Customer. • DateDelivered: • DateInvoiced: The Date Invoice indicates the date printed on the invoice. that an Order was promised for. if any. 193/461 . • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

194/461 . • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • PriceList: The List Price is the official List Price in the document currency. • PriceActual: The Actual or Unit Price indicates the Price for a product in source currency. • QtyInvoiced: The Invoiced Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that have been invoiced. • QtyDelivered: The Delivered Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that has been delivered. • QtyReserved: The Reserved Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that is currently reserved for other orders. • PriceLimit: The Price Limit indicates the lowest price for a product stated in the Price List Currency.• M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. • DirectShip: Direct Shipment indicates if this line will ship direct from the vendor to the customer • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • QtyOrdered: The Ordered Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that was ordered. Any additional charges or freight are not included. • LineNetAmt: Indicates the line net amount based on the quantity and the actual price. • M Shipper ID: The Shipper is any entity which will provide shipping to or shipping from an Organization.

• Discount: The Discount indicates the discount applied or taken as a percentage. • FreightAmt: The Freight Amount indicates the amount charged for Freight in the document currency. • C Charge ID: The Charge indicates a type of Charge (Handling, Shipping, Restocking) • ChargeAmt: The Charge Amount indicates the amount for an additional charge. Not implemented yet • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line. • Lot: The Lot Number indicates the specific lot that a product was part of. • SerNo: The Serial Number identifies a tracked, warranted product. It can only be used when the quantity is 1. • S ResourceAssignment ID: The ID identifies a unique record • Ref OrderLine ID: Reference of the Sales Order Line to the corresponding Purchase Order Line or vice versa. Not implemented yet • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • IsDescription: If a line is Description Only, e.g. Product Inventory is not corrected. No accounting transactions are created and the amount or totals are not included in the document. This for including descriptional detail lines, e.g. for an Work Order. • QuantityOrder: Product quantity in the order uom. • M Product Uom Id: Alternative order uom for the product. • Lastpriceso: The last sales order price of the product with the business partner of the sales order Custom code. Deprecated • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment

195/461

• PriceStd: The Standard Price indicates the standard or normal price for a product on this price list

25.4

C OrderLine Offer

• C Orderline Offer ID: The ID identifies a unique offer for an order line • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • C OrderLine ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment • Priceoffer: Base price before apply the offer. • Amtoffer: Amount to be discounted by the offer.

25.5

C OrderTax

The table constains the tax amount for an Order based on the lines entered. • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.

196/461

• TaxBaseAmt: The Tax Base Amount indicates the base amount used for calculating the tax amount. • TaxAmt: The Tax Amount displays the total tax amount for a document. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document.

197/461

26

Purchase specific
Material requirements are needs of material previous to purchase order

26.1

M Requisition

Contains the requirements for the materials. This requirements have a date and it’s possible to assign a vendor • M Requisition ID: The ID identifies a unique requisition • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. If the document is not saved, the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined, the field is empty if you create a new document. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). If you leave the field empty, the system will generate a document number for you. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿, where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.g. C Order). • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This can include Vendor, Customer, Employee or Salesperson • M Pricelist ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing, margin and cost of items purchased or sold. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record

198/461

199/461 Figure 26: Purchase specific

26.2

M RequisitionLine

The table defines the individual line that comprise a requisition • M Requisitionline ID: Identifies each product required to purchase in a requisition • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Requisition ID: The ID identifies a unique requisition • Dateplanned: Refers to the due date in which payment must be done. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. • Pricestd: The Standard Price indicates the standard or normal price for a product on this price list • Pricelimit: The Price Limit indicates the lowest price for a product stated in the Price List Currency. • Pricelist: The List Price is the official List Price in the document currency. • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. • Linenetamt: Indicates the line net amount based on the quantity and the actual price. Any additional charges or freight are not included.

26.3

M MatchInv

This table contains all the matches between the material receipt lines and the invoice lines. It uses only for the purchase transactions. For each material receipt line we can have one or more invoice lines, so the sum of the invoice lines has to match with his material receipt line own. When everything matches it means the material receipt line is already invoiced 200/461

• M MatchInv ID: The ID identifies a unique record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • M InOutLine ID: The Shipment/Receipt Line indicates a unique line in a Shipment/Receipt document • C InvoiceLine ID: The Invoice Line uniquely identifies a single line of an Invoice. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • DateTrx: The Transaction Date indicates the date of the transaction. • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines

26.4

M MatchPO

This table contains all the matches between the order lines and: 1. With the material receipt lines. For each order line we can have one or more materials receipt lines. The result of the sum of all the material receipt lines have to match with their own order line in order to be able to say that the order line has been already receipt. 2. With the invoice line. For each order line we can have one or more invoices lines. The result of the sum of all the invoices lines have to much with their own order line in order to be able to say that the order line has been already invoiced

• M MatchPO ID: The ID identifies a unique record

201/461

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • C OrderLine ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • M InOutLine ID: The Shipment/Receipt Line indicates a unique line in a Shipment/Receipt document • C InvoiceLine ID: The Invoice Line uniquely identifies a single line of an Invoice. • DateTrx: The Transaction Date indicates the date of the transaction. • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines

202/461

27

Transaction

Inventory Move allows to move inventory from one location or warehouse to another. Physical Inventory allows you to generate inventory count lists. Product defines all products used by an organization. These products include those sold to customers, used in the manufacture of products sold to customers and products purchased by an organization. Production defines those plan and inventory movements that occur when a product is created from a bill of materials and the work efforts of the manufacturing process. Shipment defines shipments made or to be made to a customer. Vendor Shipment defines the receipt of product or material from a Vendor. Warehouse and Locators Window defines each Warehouse, any Locators for that Warehouse and the Accounting parameters to be used for inventory in that Warehouse.

27.1

M InOut

Contains all the material transaction due to business partner shipments • M InOut ID: The Shipment / Receipt ID indicates the unique document for this shipment or receipt. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • IsSOTrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. If the document is not saved, the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined, the field is empty if you create a new document. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). If you leave the field empty, the system will generate a document number for you. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿, where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.g. C Order). • DocAction: You find the current status in the Document Status field. The options are listed in a popup • DocStatus: The Document Status indicates the status of a document at this time. If you want to change the document status, use the Document Action field

203/461

204/461 Figure 27: Transaction .

Customer. to production. • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.• Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. etc) • MovementDate: The Movement Date indicates the date that a product moved in or out of inventory. • MovementType: The Movement Type indicates the type of movement (in. 205/461 . • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. • IsPrinted: The Printed checkbox indicates if this document or line will included when printing. • DateOrdered: Indicates the Date an item was ordered. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. receipt or inventory movement. This is the result of a shipment. out. Employee or Salesperson • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. • C DocType ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. This can include Vendor.

• M Shipper ID: The Shipper is any entity which will provide shipping to or shipping from an Organization. • FreightAmt: The Freight Amount indicates the amount charged for Freight in the document currency. • FreightCostRule: The Freight Cost Rule indicates the method used when charging for freight. For example should the order be delivered when the entire order is complete. For example. A standard number can be defined in the Business Partner (Customer) window. • CreateFrom: The Create From process will create a new document based on information in an existing document selected by the user. • GenerateTo: A button that creates documents 206/461 . • C Charge ID: The Charge indicates a type of Charge (Handling. low) of this document • DatePrinted: Indicates the Date that a document was printed. • PriorityRule: The Priority indicates the importance (high. Often Purchase Order numbers are given to print on Invoices for easier reference. • DeliveryRule: The Delivery Rule indicates when an order should be delivered. • DeliveryViaRule: The Delivery Via indicates how the products should be delivered. Restocking) • ChargeAmt: The Charge Amount indicates the amount for an additional charge. Shipping. medium. • C Invoice ID: The Invoice ID uniquely identifies an Invoice Document.• POReference: The business partner order reference is the order reference for this specific transaction. when a line is complete or as the products become available. will the order be picked up or shipped.

• C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user. etc. Delivery Note.• SendEMail: Send emails with document attached (e.) • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. 207/461 . This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • SalesRep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region. and inter-organization transactions.g. with centralized services. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. Invoice. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • NoPackages: • PickDate: • ShipDate: Actual Date/Time of Shipment (pick up) • TrackingNo: • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization).

You cannot share data between Clients. • M InOut ID: The Shipment / Receipt ID indicates the unique document for this shipment or receipt. 208/461 . Deprecated • Islogistic: If is logistic it won’t be invoiced. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document.2 M InOutLine The table defines the individual line that comprise shipment line • M InOutLine ID: The Shipment/Receipt Line indicates a unique line in a Shipment/Receipt document • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. It uses for companies that rent locators or incoming materials that we don’t want to invoice • GenerateLines: A button that creates in out lines • Calculate Freight: Calculate freight cost • Delivery Location ID: Location where the product will be delivered to • M Freightcategory ID: Freight Categories are used to calculate the Freight for the Shipper selected 27.• UpdateLines: Update attribute lines from shipment Custom code. • C OrderLine ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located.

• M Product Uom Id: Alternative order uom for the product. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. for an Work Order. Deprecated 27. • QuantityOrder: Product quantity in the order uom. It can only be used when the quantity is 1. e. e. No accounting transactions are created and the amount or totals are not included in the document. Product Inventory is not corrected. warranted product. 209/461 .g. • M Inoutline Type ID: The ID identifies a unique record Custom code. • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • IsDescription: If a line is Description Only. • SerNo: The Serial Number identifies a tracked.• M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.3 M Movement Contains all the material transactions due to movements between warehouses • M Movement ID: The Inventory Movement uniquely identifies a group of movement lines. This for including descriptional detail lines. You cannot share data between Clients.g. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • MovementQty: The Movement Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that has been moved. • IsInvoiced: Indicator if invoiced • Lot: The Lot Number indicates the specific lot that a product was part of.

• AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination.• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. • Move FromTo Locator: Move all the products there are in a locator to another 210/461 . The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. with centralized services. This is the result of a shipment. • MovementDate: The Movement Date indicates the date that a product moved in or out of inventory. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. receipt or inventory movement. and inter-organization transactions. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment.

It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. the field is empty if you create a new document. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • M Movement ID: The Inventory Movement uniquely identifies a group of movement lines. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. 27. You cannot share data between Clients. C Order). If you leave the field empty.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined.• DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. • M LocatorTo ID: The Locator To indicates the location where the inventory is being moved to. • MovementQty: The Movement Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that has been moved. If the document is not saved. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice).g. the system will generate a document number for you.4 M MovementLine Contains the products and the quantities moved and the location it is moving from and to • M MovementLine ID: The Movement Line indicates the inventory movement document line (if applicable) for this transaction • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 211/461 . The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.

• Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. You cannot share data between Clients.• M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • M Product Uom Id: Alternative order uom for the product. • QuantityOrder: Product quantity in the order uom. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. This is the result of a shipment. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • MovementDate: The Movement Date indicates the date that a product moved in or out of inventory.5 M Inventory Contains all the material transactions due to inventory • M Inventory ID: The Physical Inventory indicates a unique parameters for a physical inventory. 212/461 . • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure 27. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. receipt or inventory movement.

• UpdateQty: Update the quantities that has been changed into the original quantities. 27. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. You cannot share data between Clients. This only can do it before you process the inventory • GenerateList: A button that generates a list to make an inventory of items • M PerpetualInv ID: The Perpetual Inventory identifies the Perpetual Inventory rule which generated this Physical Inventory. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination.6 M InventoryLine Contains the counts of the individual products in inventory • M InventoryLine ID: The Physical Inventory Line indicates the inventory document line (if applicable) for this transaction • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 213/461 . and inter-organization transactions. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. with centralized services.

214/461 . • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. You cannot share data between Clients. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • QuantityOrderBook: Quantity order book 27.7 M Internal Consumption Contains all the material transactions due to maintenance without a shipment • M Internal Consumption ID: Identifies an internal consumption of products. • QuantityOrder: Product quantity in the order uom. • QtyBook: The Quantity Book indicates the line count stored in the system for a product in inventory • QtyCount: The Quantity Count indicates the actual inventory count taken for a product in inventory • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • M Product Uom Id: Alternative order uom for the product.• M Inventory ID: The Physical Inventory indicates a unique parameters for a physical inventory. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document.

8 M Internal ConsumptionLine The table defines the individual product that comprise an internal consumption line • M Internal Consumptionline ID: The ID identifies a unique record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. 27. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 215/461 . • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. • Movementqty: The Movement Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that has been moved. • Movementdate: The Movement Date indicates the date that a product moved in or out of inventory. receipt or inventory movement. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. You cannot share data between Clients. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • M Internal Consumption ID: Identifies an internal consumption of products.• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. This is the result of a shipment.

The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • IsCreated: Check to indicate that the records has been created and the production is ready to be processed.9 M Production Contains the header of the work effort • M Production ID: The Production uniquely identifies a Production Plan • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Attributesetinstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • M Product Uom ID: Alternative order uom for the product. • MovementDate: The Movement Date indicates the date that a product moved in or out of inventory. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. This is the result of a shipment. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 216/461 . receipt or inventory movement. • Quantityorder: Product quantity in the order uom.• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • C Uom ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure 27.

The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. and inter-organization transactions. • Issotrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. the system will generate a document number for you. If you leave the field empty. • Starttime: Start time in hours. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. 217/461 . • Endtime: End time in hours.• Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. the field is empty if you create a new document. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.g. C Order). with centralized services. If the document is not saved. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice).If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined.

• MA Wrphase ID: Indicates a Work Requirement Phase. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • ProductionQty: The Production Quantity identifies the number of products to produce • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. 218/461 .• Validating: Process to validate the work effort. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.10 M ProductionPlan Contains the items used and generated in a production • M ProductionPlan ID: The Production Plan identifies the items and steps in generating a product. • Conversionrate: It is the rate between primary unit and secondary unit. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • Neededquantity: How many times it is necessary to complete a phase before closing it. • M Production ID: The Production uniquely identifies a Production Plan • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. 27. Primary quantity = (secondary quantity)/(conversion rate) • MA Costcenteruse: Use of the cost center.

• M ProductionPlan ID: The Production Plan identifies the items and steps in generating a product. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. You cannot share data between Clients. work requirement phase or production run.• Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. 27. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • Secondaryunit: Is an optional unit to define the number of times that is desired to perform the process. • Realcost: Real Cost • Rejectedquantity: How many products have been rejected.11 M ProductionLine Contains all the products that have been used or created in the production run and the quantities • M ProductionLine ID: The Production Line indicates the production document line (if applicable) for this transaction • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 219/461 . • Outsourced: Indicates that the correspondent process is being outsourced for the sequence. • MA Costcenter Version ID: Identifies a cost center version valid during a time period. • Usedmaterial: Process to generate standards on production run. • Secondaryqty: Secondary quantity. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document.

Deprecated 27.• MovementQty: The Movement Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that has been moved. • Rejectedquantity: How many products have been rejected. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Secquality: Custom code. A positive production means that is an output product.12 M Transaction Contains all the material transactions for products that are defined as an item and stocked • M Transaction ID: The ID identifies a unique record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Deprecated • Calculated: Indicates that the record has been calculated. 220/461 . • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • M Product Uom Id: Alternative order uom for the product. • Productiontype: Indicates if the product is used in the sequence or is generated. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • PrintLabel: Process to print labels for the product. Custom code. • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located.a negative productions refers to an input product. • QuantityOrder: Product quantity in the order uom. You cannot share data between Clients. So&nbsp.

You can issue Receipts. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure 221/461 . This is the result of a shipment. Time and Expenses. to production. • QuantityOrder: Product quantity in the order uom. • M InventoryLine ID: The Physical Inventory Line indicates the inventory document line (if applicable) for this transaction • M MovementLine ID: The Movement Line indicates the inventory movement document line (if applicable) for this transaction • M InOutLine ID: The Shipment/Receipt Line indicates a unique line in a Shipment/Receipt document • M ProductionLine ID: The Production Line indicates the production document line (if applicable) for this transaction • C ProjectIssue ID: Issues to the project initiated by the Issue to Project process. etc) • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • MovementQty: The Movement Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that has been moved. • MovementDate: The Movement Date indicates the date that a product moved in or out of inventory.• MovementType: The Movement Type indicates the type of movement (in. receipt or inventory movement. • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • M Product Uom Id: Alternative order uom for the product. out. or Stock.

13 M Storage Detail Containts the current stock for every product • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • M Storage Detail ID: The ID identifies a unique record 222/461 . • PreQtyOnHand: The quantity that we have already purchased but are not still in the warehouse • PreQtyOrderOnHand: The quantity that we have already purchased but are not still in the warehouse in the second uom • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.27. • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. You cannot share data between Clients. • QtyOnHand: The On Hand Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that is on hand in a warehouse. • QtyOrderOnHand: The On Hand Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that is on hand in a warehouse in the second uom • DateLastInventory: The Date Last Inventory Count indicates the last time an Inventory count was done. • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • C Uom ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • M Product Uom ID: Alternative order uom for the product.

• QtyOrderReserved: The Reserved Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that is currently reserved for other orders in the second uom • QtyOrdered: The Ordered Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that was ordered. • QtyOrderOrdered: The Ordered Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that was ordered in the second uom • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • QtyReserved: The Reserved Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that is currently reserved for other orders. • M Storage Pending ID: 223/461 . • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided.27. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Attributesetinstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • C Uom ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • M Product Uom ID: Alternative order uom for the product.14 M Storage Pending Constains the reserved quantity and the ordered quantity • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.

Vendor Invoice allows you to display and enter Invoices from a Vendor. the field is empty if you create a new document. use the Document Action field • DocAction: You find the current status in the Document Status field.28 Invoice Enter expense invoices from your vendors Expense invoice Maintain Payment Schedule of unpaid invoices Customer Invoice allows you to display and enter invoices for a customer. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice).1 C Invoice Contains all the invoices • C Invoice ID: The Invoice ID uniquely identifies an Invoice Document. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined.g. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 224/461 . the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. • DocStatus: The Document Status indicates the status of a document at this time. If you want to change the document status. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • IsSOTrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. You cannot share data between Clients. If you leave the field empty. C Order). If the document is not saved. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. the system will generate a document number for you. The options are listed in a popup • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. 28.

225/461 Figure 28: Invoice .

• SalesRep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region. This processing is initiated by selecting the appropriate Document Action. This can include Vendor. • DateInvoiced: The Date Invoice indicates the date printed on the invoice. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. Employee or Salesperson 226/461 . • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. • DatePrinted: Indicates the Date that a document was printed. from Offer to Order or Invoice). • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The conversion is then reflected in the current type. • IsTransferred: The transferred checkbox indicates if the transactions associated with this document should be transferred to the General Ledger. • IsPrinted: The Printed checkbox indicates if this document or line will included when printing.• Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • C DocType ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules • C DocTypeTarget ID: You can convert document types (e.g. Customer. • IsApproved: The Approved checkbox indicates if this document requires approval before it can be processed. Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user.

This is also known as the gross price. • IsTaxIncluded: The Tax Included checkbox indicates if the prices include tax. • IsDiscountPrinted: The Discount Printed Checkbox indicates if the discount will be printed on the document. • TotalLines: The Total amount displays the total of all lines in document currency • GrandTotal: The Grand Total displays the total amount including Tax and Freight in document currency • M PriceList ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing. Not implemented yet 227/461 .• C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • POReference: The business partner order reference is the order reference for this specific transaction. margin and cost of items purchased or sold. Often Purchase Order numbers are given to print on Invoices for easier reference. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • PaymentRule: The Payment Rule indicates the method of invoice payment. A standard number can be defined in the Business Partner (Customer) window. Shipping. • C PaymentTerm ID: Payment Terms identify the method and timing of payment for this transaction. • DateOrdered: Indicates the Date an item was ordered. • C Charge ID: The Charge indicates a type of Charge (Handling. Restocking) • ChargeAmt: The Charge Amount indicates the amount for an additional charge.

• C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program.g. • GenerateTo: A button that creates documents • SendEMail: Send emails with document attached (e. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. and inter-organization transactions. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • IsPaid: The document is paid • CreateFrom: The Create From process will create a new document based on information in an existing document selected by the user. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • CopyFrom: Copy record lines • IsSelfService: Self-Service allows users to enter data or update their data. that this record was entered or created via Self-Service or that the user can change it via the Self-Service functionality. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). Delivery Note. Invoice. etc. The flag indicates.) • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. 228/461 . with centralized services.

• C Invoice ID: The Invoice ID uniquely identifies an Invoice Document. You cannot share data between Clients. • C OrderLine ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order.2 C Invoice Discount Contains the discounts apply to the whole invoice • C Invoice Discount ID: The ID identifies a unique discount for the invoice • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. You cannot share data between Clients.28. 28. • C Invoice ID: The Invoice ID uniquely identifies an Invoice Document.3 C InvoiceLine Contains the individual items or charges on an Invoice • C InvoiceLine ID: The Invoice Line uniquely identifies a single line of an Invoice. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Discount ID: Discount applicable to prices. • Cascade: Indicates if it is applied in an accumulative way or if it is applied to the base amount. 229/461 . It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • M InOutLine ID: The Shipment/Receipt Line indicates a unique line in a Shipment/Receipt document • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document.

• QtyInvoiced: The Invoiced Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that have been invoiced. 230/461 . Shipping. especially that which could be converted to cash. • PriceLimit: The Price Limit indicates the lowest price for a product stated in the Price List Currency. Restocking) • ChargeAmt: The Charge Amount indicates the amount for an additional charge.• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • PriceList: The List Price is the official List Price in the document currency. • S ResourceAssignment ID: The ID identifies a unique record • A Asset ID: Any item of economic value owned by the corporation. • PriceActual: The Actual or Unit Price indicates the Price for a product in source currency. Not implemented yet • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line. • C Charge ID: The Charge indicates a type of Charge (Handling. • LineNetAmt: Indicates the line net amount based on the quantity and the actual price. Any additional charges or freight are not included. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • TaxAmt: The Tax Amount displays the total tax amount for a document.

No accounting transactions are created and the amount or totals are not included in the document. • QuantityOrder: Product quantity in the order uom. • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment 231/461 . You cannot share data between Clients.g. • M Product Uom Id: Alternative order uom for the product. Product Inventory is not corrected. for an Work Order. • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment • PriceStd: The Standard Price indicates the standard or normal price for a product on this price list 28. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document.g. • C Invoiceline ID: The Invoice Line uniquely identifies a single line of an Invoice. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Invoice Discount ID: The ID identifies a unique discount for the invoice • C Projectline ID: The Project Line indicates a unique project line. e. e.• M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • IsDescription: If a line is Description Only. • C Invoiceline Offer ID: Offers applied to the invoice line.4 C InvoiceLine Offer Contains all the offers applies to an invoice line. This for including descriptional detail lines. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document.

You can then report based on a specific Campaign. • Amtoffer: Amount to be discounted by the offer. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. 28. 232/461 . • C Invoiceline ID: The Invoice Line uniquely identifies a single line of an Invoice.6 C InvoiceTax Contains the total tax due based on the Invoice Lines • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line. • Amt: Amount • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign.• Priceoffer: Base price before apply the offer. • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. 28.5 C InvoiceLine AcctDimension Accounting dimension • C Invoiceline Acctdimension ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Invoice ID: The Invoice ID uniquely identifies an Invoice Document. You cannot share data between Clients.

• TaxBaseAmt: The Tax Base Amount indicates the base amount used for calculating the tax amount. 233/461 .• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • TaxAmt: The Tax Amount displays the total tax amount for a document. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. You cannot share data between Clients.

29 Commission Define how and when you want the commissions to be calculated and to whom to pay it. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.1 C Commission Contains all the commissions and when to pay a commission to whom. you start the calculation of the commission after the transaction for that period are completed or closed. Customer. Commission Run displays the results of processing commissions. Employee or Salesperson • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • FrequencyType: The frequency type is used for calculating the date of the next event. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • DocBasisType: The Calculation Basis indicates the basis to be used for the commission calculation. • DateLastRun: The Date Last Run indicates the last time that a process was run. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. 234/461 . • C Commission ID: The Commission ID is a unique identifier of a set of commission rules. You cannot share data between Clients. Commissions defines how commissions and royalties will be paid. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. This can include Vendor. For each period. 29. • ListDetails: The List Details checkbox indicates that the details for each document line will be displayed.

235/461 Figure 29: Commission .

• Line: Indicates the unique line for a document.• CreateFrom: The Create From process will create a new document based on information in an existing document selected by the user. • AmtMultiplier: The Multiplier Amount indicates the amount to multiply the total amount generated by this commission run by.g.2 C CommissionLine Define the selection criteria for paying the commission. If the commission run was done in detail mode then each document that was included in the run will have its own commission line. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • C CommissionLine ID: The Commission Line is a unique instance of a Commission Run. If you do not enter restricting parameters (e. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • AmtSubtract: The Subtract Amount indicates the amount to subtract from the total amount prior to multiplication. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Commission ID: The Commission ID is a unique identifier of a set of commission rules. You cannot share data between Clients. If the commission run was done in summary mode then there will be a single line representing the selected documents totals. 29. all transactions for the period will be used to calculate the commission. 236/461 . for specific Business Partner (Groups) or Product (Categories). etc.

the Commission Run ID will display. • Org ID: An organization is a unit of your client or legal entity . • IsPositiveOnly: The Positive Only check box indicates that if the result of the subtraction is negative. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. When a Commission is processed on the Commission Screen. Customer. This would mean that negative commissions would not be generated. department.examples are store. 237/461 . Product categories are used for pricing. • CommissionOrders: Sales Reps are entered in Orders and Invoices. If selected. only Orders and Invoices for this Sales Reps are included in the calculation of the commission. • C BP Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners.3 C CommissionRun Contains all the commission run for a period • C CommissionRun ID: The Commission Run is a unique system defined identifier of a specific run of commission. it is ignored. 29. • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to.• QtySubtract: The Quantity Subtract identifies the quantity to be subtracted before multiplication • QtyMultiplier: The Multiplier Quantity field indicates the amount to multiply the quantities accumulated for this commission run. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This can include Vendor. Employee or Salesperson • C SalesRegion ID: The Sales Region indicates a specific area of sales coverage.

• DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. If the document is not saved. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. C Order).g. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. You cannot share data between Clients. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • GrandTotal: The Grand Total displays the total amount including Tax and Freight in document currency • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. the system will generate a document number for you. the field is empty if you create a new document. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • C Invoice ID: The Invoice ID uniquely identifies an Invoice Document. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.4 C CommissionAmt Contains all the commission lines amounts • C CommissionAmt ID: The Commission Amount indicates the resulting amount from a Commission Run. 29. • StartDate: The Start Date indicates the first or starting date of a range. • C Commission ID: The Commission ID is a unique identifier of a set of commission rules. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). 238/461 . If you leave the field empty. You cannot share data between Clients.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿.

• C CommissionRun ID: The Commission Run is a unique system defined identifier of a specific run of commission.The amounts are converted from the transaction currency to the Commission Currency (defined in the Commission window) • C CommissionDetail ID: The Commission Detail provides supporting information on a Commission Run. If the commission run was done in detail mode then each document that was included in the run will have its own commission line. but the suggested way is to add new correcting lines. • Reference: The Reference displays the source document number. • ConvertedAmt: The Converted Amount is the result of multiplying the Source Amount by the Conversion Rate for this target currency. 239/461 . • C OrderLine ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order. You cannot share data between Clients. the Commission Run ID will display. It is based on the parameters as defined for this Commission Run. Each document line that was part of the Commission Run will be reflected here. • CommissionAmt: The Commission Amount is the total calculated commission. • ActualQty: The Actual Quantity indicates the quantity as referenced on a document.5 C CommissionDetail You may alter the amount and quantity of the detail records. If the commission run was done in summary mode then there will be a single line representing the selected documents totals. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 29. When a Commission is processed on the Commission Screen. • C CommissionAmt ID: The Commission Amount indicates the resulting amount from a Commission Run. • C CommissionLine ID: The Commission Line is a unique instance of a Commission Run.

• Info: The Information displays data from the source document line. 240/461 . • ActualQty: The Actual Quantity indicates the quantity as referenced on a document. • ConvertedAmt: The Converted Amount is the result of multiplying the Source Amount by the Conversion Rate for this target currency.• C InvoiceLine ID: The Invoice Line uniquely identifies a single line of an Invoice. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • ActualAmt: Actual amount indicates the agreed upon amount for a document.

• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Include Product Category: If it is checked the selected categories will be included else they will be excluded. This includes customers. You cannot share data between Clients. vendors and employees. otherwise the maximun applicable discount will be applied to every amount. 30. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Scaled: If rappel is scaled each scale of amount will have a different discount. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 241/461 . • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • Include Product: If it is checked the selected products will be included else they will be excluded. Rappels defined the different rappels when a client reaches a certain sales volume. Each rappel is managed through different product categories and is applicable to partners that have been included.30 Rappel Business Partner allows to define any party with whom you transact.1 M Rappel Contains all the configuration rappels • M Rappel ID: The ID identifies a unique rappel • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

242/461 Figure 30: Rappel .

You cannot share data between Clients. This rappel only applies to business partners recorded on this tab. • M Rappel ID: The ID identifies a unique rappel 243/461 . • ValidFrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range • ValidTo: The Valid To date indicates the last day of a date range • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • GenerateInvoice: A button that generates all the invoices as a result of the activity of the business partner during a period of time 30. You cannot share data between Clients.2 M Rappel Bpartner Contains all the configuration rappels.30. This can include Vendor. • M Rappel Bpartner ID: The ID identifies a unique rappel for the partner • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.3 M Rappel Product Contains the discount configuration for the product • M Rappel Product ID: The ID identifies a unique product for the rappel • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Employee or Salesperson • IsSOTrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. Customer. • M Rappel ID: The ID identifies a unique rappel • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.

You cannot share data between Clients.• M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.4 M Rappel Productcategory Contains the discount configuration for the product category • M Rappel Productcategory ID: The ID identifies a unique product category for the rappel • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Amnt From: The minumun amount the discount is applied to. • M Rappel ID: The ID identifies a unique rappel • Discount: The Discount indicates the discount applied or taken as a percentage.5 M Rappel Scale Defines the scales where the discounts will be applied • M Rappel Scale ID: The ID identifies a unique scale for the rappel • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Amnt To: The maximun amount the discount is applied to. • M Rappel ID: The ID identifies a unique rappel • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. • Discount: The Discount indicates the discount applied or taken as a percentage. 30. Product categories are used for pricing. You cannot share data between Clients. 30. 244/461 .

• M Rappel Bpartner ID: The ID identifies a unique rappel for the partner • C Invoice ID: The Invoice ID uniquely identifies an Invoice Document. You cannot share data between Clients. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records 245/461 .30.6 M Rappel Invoice Contains all the invoices generated due to rappels conditions • M Rappel Invoice ID: The ID identifies a unique rappel for the invoice • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

31.2 C Phase Standard Phase of the project with performance information • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. Budget Project is used to manage civil works engineering projects where request for proposals are made and assigned to winning vendors.creates Project/Job WIP transactions . for Service/Charge projectsWork Order .g.1 C ProjectType Contains the differents types of a project.no special accounting. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records 246/461 . e. comment or help about the use of this item. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.no special accounting. for Presales or general trackingService . • ProjectCategory: The Project Category determines the behavior of the project:General .g.abili 31. e. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.31 Project Maintain Project Types and their Phases with standard performance information Project is used to define the projects which will be tracked via documents. • C ProjectType ID: Type of the project with optional phases of the project with standard performance information • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.

247/461 Figure 31: Project .

comment or help about the use of this item. comment or help about the use of this item. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Help: The Help field contains a hint.3 C Task Standard Project Task • C Task ID: Standard Project Task in a Project Phase with standard effort • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Help: The Help field contains a hint.• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 248/461 . • C ProjectType ID: Type of the project with optional phases of the project with standard performance information • StandardQty: • C Phase ID: Phase of the project with standard performance information with standard work • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 31. You cannot share data between Clients.

C Order). It also is defines the tracks the amounts assigned to. • Note: The Note field allows for optional entry of user defined information regarding this record • IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. .• C Phase ID: Phase of the project with standard performance information with standard work • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. status. . • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Name and Description for each project. You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. If you leave the search key empty.4 C Project Contains the Value. committed to and used for this project. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact 249/461 . where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. .g. • StandardQty: 31. This tab is used in order to introduce information regarding a project: Address. the system automatically creates a numeric number.

• IsCommitment: Commitment indicates if the document is legally binding. • PlannedQty: The Planned Quantity indicates the anticipated quantity for this project or project line • PlannedMarginAmt: The Planned Margin Amount indicates the anticipated margin amount for this project or project line. • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. A standard number can be defined in the Business Partner (Customer) window. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • M PriceList Version ID: Each Price List can have multiple versions. This can include Vendor. 250/461 . The most common use is to indicate the dates that a Price List is valid for. Often Purchase Order numbers are given to print on Invoices for easier reference. • PlannedAmt: The Planned Amount indicates the anticipated amount for this project or project line. Employee or Salesperson • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • POReference: The business partner order reference is the order reference for this specific transaction. • CommittedAmt: The commitment amount is independent from the planned amount. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. which might be higher or lower than the commitment amount. Customer. You would use the planned amount for your realistic estimation. • C PaymentTerm ID: Payment Terms identify the method and timing of payment for this transaction.• C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.

The contract date is used in reports and report parameters. • SalesRep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region. if the amount or quantity is zero. which might be higher or lower than the commitment amount. Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user. Ignored. • InvoicedAmt: The amount invoiced • InvoicedQty: The Quantity Invoiced • ProjectBalanceAmt: The project balance is the sum of all invoices and payments • C Phase ID: Phase of the project with standard performance information with standard work • IsCommitCeiling: The commitment amount and quantity is the maximum amount and quantity to be charged. • GenerateTo: A button that creates documents • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • CopyFrom: Copy record lines • C ProjectType ID: Type of the project with optional phases of the project with standard performance information • CommittedQty: The commitment amount is independent from the planned amount. 251/461 . • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided.• DateContract: The contract date is used to determine when the document becomes effective. • DateFinish: The finish date is used to indicate when the project is expected to be completed or has been completed. You would use the planned amount for your realistic estimation. This is usually the contract date.

g.abili • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. for Presales or general trackingService . e.¡BR¿No following up: No follow up the project¡BR¿Order: The project has been won by a partner we have sent a budget¡BR¿Order closed: All the products have been delivered • Projectkind: Indicates the kind of work • BillTo ID: The Bill/Invoice To indicates the address to use when remitting bills • Projectphase: Different phases for a project • GenerateOrder: ¡P¿This process lets you to generate a purchase order to this project. • PaymentRule: The Payment Rule indicates the method of invoice payment.• ProjectCategory: The Project Category determines the behavior of the project:General . The project has already not been won.¡/P¿ • ChangeProjectStatus: This process changes the status of this projecto. • Publicprivate: A public o private enterprise. e.g.there can be 5 the status of the project:¡BR¿Open: The budget is sent.no special accounting.¡BR¿Lost: The project has been won by a partner who has not been sent the budgetal or our budget has not been selected. Usually&nbsp. This are the most tipical intiatives • Projectstatus: ¡P¿Indicates the current status of the project. • C Location ID: The Location / Address field defines the location of an entity.no special accounting. • Invoice ToProject: This option indicates if the invoices has been sent to the winner are Origen invoices 252/461 . margin and cost of items purchased or sold. • M PriceList ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing.creates Project/Job WIP transactions . for Service/Charge projectsWork Order .

You cannot share data between Clients.5 C ProjectPhase Actual Phase of the Project with Status information .generated from Phase of Project Type. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Servrevenue: Revenue services • Servcost: Service cost • Servmargin: Service margin • Expreinvoicing: Reinvoicing Expenses • Expexpenses: Expected expenses • Expmargin: Expected margin • Setprojecttype: Set Project Type and for Service Projects copy Phases and Tasks of Project Type into Project 31.• PlannedPOAmt: Planned amount for the purchase order • LastPlannedProposalDate: Last day of following up the budget for the project • Document Copies: Number of copies • Accountno: The Account Number indicates the Number assigned to this account • Responsible ID: An employee that is the responsible of the project. 253/461 .

• C Phase ID: Phase of the project with standard performance information with standard work • C ProjectPhase ID: The ID identifies a unique phase for the project • Help: The Help field contains a hint. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. which might be higher or lower than the commitment amount. • GenerateOrder: ¡P¿This process lets you to generate a purchase order to this project. • PriceActual: The Actual or Unit Price indicates the Price for a product in source currency. • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document.• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • EndDate: The End Date indicates the last date in this range. • StartDate: The Start Date indicates the first or starting date of a range. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. comment or help about the use of this item. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • CommittedAmt: The commitment amount is independent from the planned amount. You would use the planned amount for your realistic estimation. • IsComplete: Indication that this is complete • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. 254/461 .¡/P¿ • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.

The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 255/461 . comment or help about the use of this item. • C Task ID: Standard Project Task in a Project Phase with standard effort • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. • C ProjectPhase ID: The ID identifies a unique phase for the project • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. 31. if the amount or quantity is zero. Ignored. You cannot share data between Clients. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.6 C ProjectTask A Project Task in a Project Phase represents the actual work.• IsCommitCeiling: The commitment amount and quantity is the maximum amount and quantity to be charged.7 C ProjectLine Contians the lines (products and/or services) associated with the Project • C ProjectLine ID: The Project Line indicates a unique project line. 31. • C ProjectTask ID: A Project Task in a Project Phase represents the actual work. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.

• M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. • PlannedMarginAmt: The Planned Margin Amount indicates the anticipated margin amount for this project or project line. You cannot share data between Clients.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • PlannedAmt: The Planned Amount indicates the anticipated amount for this project or project line. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. which might be higher or lower than the commitment amount. Product categories are used for pricing. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. 256/461 . You would use the planned amount for your realistic estimation. • PlannedQty: The Planned Quantity indicates the anticipated quantity for this project or project line • PlannedPrice: The Planned Price indicates the anticipated price for this project line. • InvoicedAmt: The amount invoiced • InvoicedQty: The Quantity Invoiced • CommittedQty: The commitment amount is independent from the planned amount. • CommittedAmt: The commitment amount is independent from the planned amount. You would use the planned amount for your realistic estimation. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. which might be higher or lower than the commitment amount. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

• Product Value: • Product Name: Name of the product • Product Description: Description for the product 31. • DoPricing: • Plannedpoprice: Indicates the planned price for the purchase order • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project 257/461 .• C ProjectIssue ID: Issues to the project initiated by the Issue to Project process. • C OrderPO ID: Purchase order • IsPrinted: The Printed checkbox indicates if this document or line will included when printing. You cannot share data between Clients.8 C Project Vendor Contians all the vendors which have participated in the budgetting of a certain project • C Project Vendor ID: The ID identifies a unique vendor for the project • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You can issue Receipts. Time and Expenses. • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. or Stock.

You cannot share data between Clients. Customer. The most common use is to indicate the dates that a Price List is valid for. Employee or Salesperson • Note: The Note field allows for optional entry of user defined information regarding this record • M PriceList Version ID: Each Price List can have multiple versions. • GenerateOrder: ¡P¿This process lets you to generate a purchase order to this project.9 C ProjectProposal Contains the budgets assigned to business partners and a project • C Projectproposal ID: The ID identifies a unique proposal for the project • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Incoterms ID: The ID identifies a unique Incoterm • Incoterms Description: • M PriceList ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing. margin and cost of items purchased or sold. This can include Vendor. This can include Vendor. Employee or Salesperson • Datesend: The date of the proposal was sent • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner 258/461 . • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.• C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.¡/P¿ 31. Customer.

. • Projectwon: Award contract to project • Paymentrule: The Payment Rule indicates the method of invoice payment. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Projectproposal ID: The ID identifies a unique proposal for the project • Lineno: Number of the line 259/461 . • C Projectproposalline ID: The ID identifies a unique line proposal for the project • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.10 C ProjectProposalLine Contains all budgetted products to a Business Partner detailing information such as quantity. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • CopyFrom: Copy record lines • HeaderNote: Using this field you can write a text that will show on the header of the document when you print it • FootNote: Using this field you can write a text that will show on the foot of the document when you print it • IsSOTrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. . 31. price. • C Paymentterm ID: Payment Terms identify the method and timing of payment for this transaction. .• AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system.

• Product Value: • Product Name: Name of the product • Product Description: Description for the product 31. • Price: The Price indicates the Price for a product or service. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document.• M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.11 C ProjectProposalTask Contains all the tasks that comprise a proposal • C Projectproposaltask ID: The ID identifies a unique task for the proposal of the project • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Projectproposal ID: The ID identifies a unique proposal for the project • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. You cannot share data between Clients. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • Note: The Note field allows for optional entry of user defined information regarding this record 260/461 .

32 Services Time type maintains different types of time for reporting. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. Sales Tax or Value Added Tax.g. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. C Order). You cannot share data between Clients. the system automatically creates a numeric number. Product categories are used for pricing. 261/461 . If you leave the search key empty. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. For example.1 S ExpenseType Contains all the expsenses types for reporting purpose • S ExpenseType ID: Expense report type • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The time and expense report allows you to capture time spent on a project. 32. • IsInvoiced: Indicator if invoiced • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. • C TaxCategory ID: The Tax Category provides a method of grouping similar taxes. billable time and to claim expenses.

262/461 Figure 32: Services .

2 S TimeType Contains all the time types for reporting purposes (In parallel to Activities) • S TimeType ID: Differentiate time types for reporting purposes (In parallel to Activities) • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. C Order). • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document.32. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. 32. You cannot share data between Clients. Employee or Salesperson 263/461 . This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). comment or help about the use of this item.3 S TimeExpense Contains the time and expenses for the Employee or Contractor (Business Partner) • S TimeExpense ID: The ID identifies a unique record for the expense report • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. the system will generate a document number for you. Customer. You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. If you leave the field empty. the field is empty if you create a new document. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. If the document is not saved. This can include Vendor. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.g.

4 S TimeExpenseLine Contains all the expense items and billable or non-billable hours • S TimeExpenseLine ID: The ID identifies a unique record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.• DateReport: Date of Expense/Time Report • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • IsApproved: The Approved checkbox indicates if this document requires approval before it can be processed. • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. You cannot share data between Clients. 32. • S TimeExpense ID: The ID identifies a unique record for the expense report • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • IsTimeReport: The line contains only time information • DateExpense: Date of expense • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • ExpenseAmt: Expense amount in currency 264/461 .

• C InvoiceLine ID: The Invoice Line uniquely identifies a single line of an Invoice. Employee or Salesperson • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. 265/461 . You can then report based on a specific Campaign.• C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • ConvertedAmt: The Converted Amount is the result of multiplying the Source Amount by the Conversion Rate for this target currency. Customer. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. • Note: The Note field allows for optional entry of user defined information regarding this record • IsInvoiced: Indicator if invoiced • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • C OrderLine ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order. the standard price of the sales price list of the business partner (customer) is used. This can include Vendor. • S ResourceAssignment ID: The ID identifies a unique record • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • InvoicePrice: Unit Price in the currency of the business partner! If it is 0.

• C ProjectPhase ID: The ID identifies a unique phase for the project • C ProjectTask ID: A Project Task in a Project Phase represents the actual work. • S TimeType ID: Differentiate time types for reporting purposes (In parallel to Activities) 266/461 .

Sales Order Window allows you to enter and modify Sales Orders. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. the merchant can key a transaction for settlement at which time the customer’s credit card is charged for the transaction and the proceeds are deposited into the merchant account. • C DocType ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules 267/461 . the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. the system will generate a document number for you.33 Payment management Remitance Type defines the types of remittances defining its status. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. Vendor Invoice allows you to display and enter Invoices from a Vendor. the field is empty if you create a new document. C Order). • DateTrx: The Transaction Date indicates the date of the transaction.1 C Settlement Termination of a business operation by using its assets to discharge its liabilities. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). once the goods have been shipped to the customer. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Settlement manual allows users to create settlements that are not automatically generated by the system. If you leave the field empty. payment rule and paramters Customer Invoice allows you to display and enter invoices for a customer.g. For example.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. Settlement is used to manage settlements. 33. Purchase Order Window defines a purchase order for an organization. • C Settlement ID: Termination of a business operation by using its assets to discharge its liabilities. meaning that are not coming from an invoice. If the document is not saved. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. Only Generated and Cancelled settlements are chown here.

268/461 Figure 33: Payment management .

• CreateFrom: The Create From process will create a new document based on information in an existing document selected by the user. 269/461 . • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • Chargedamt: Indicates the total amount of the payments that have been canceled and charged. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination.• Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • Generatedamt: Indicates the total amount of the payments that have been generated in this settlement. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • Cancelednotchargeamt: Indicates the amount that has been canceled but has generated no charges in the bank account or cash.

• C Debt Payment ID: Refers to the amount of money to be paid or collected. 33. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.2 C Debt Payment Refers to the amount of money to be paid or collected. 270/461 . • C Settlement Generate ID: Refers to the settlement in which this Debt/Payment has been generated. • IsReceipt: This is a sales transaction (receipt) • C Settlement Cancel ID: Refers to the settlement in which this Debt/Payment has been cancelled. • CreateFile: Create file • Dateacct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • Settlementtype: Indicates the type of settlement (settlement or manual settlement) • SettlementOpen: Not implemented yet • Copyfrom: Copy record lines • IsTemplate: Template is checked when the element is used as a template. • C Invoice ID: The Invoice ID uniquely identifies an Invoice Document.

Employee or Salesperson • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • C CashLine ID: The Cash Journal Line indicates a unique line in a cash journal. • WriteOffAmt: The Write Off Amount indicates the amount to be written off as uncollectible. Withdrawal. • Dateplanned: Refers to the due date in which payment must be done.• C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • C BankAccount ID: The Bank Account identifies an account at this Bank. • IsManual: The Manual check box indicates if the process will done manually. Charge) for the defined time period at this Bank. • PaymentRule: The Payment Rule indicates the method of invoice payment. 271/461 . • IsPaid: The document is paid • Amount: The Amount indicates the amount for this document line. • Changesettlementcancel: • Cancel Processed: The settlement cancel is processed. Customer. This can include Vendor. • IsValid: The element passed the validation check • C BankStatementLine ID: The Bank Statement Line identifies a unique transaction (Payment. The cash book is used to record cash transactions. • C CashBook ID: The Cash Book identifies a unique cash book.

• C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • IsAutomaticGenerated: It is automatically generated. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.3 C Glitem • C Glitem ID: General ledger item.• Generate Processed: The settlement generate is processed. 272/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Status: Current status of a debt/payment. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 33. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. • GLItemAmt: • Isdirectposting: Direct Posting • C Glitem ID: General ledger item. • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Status Initial: Status of a debt/payment when it is created.

5 C Debt Payment Bal Replace GL items used to replace existing ones when the settlement is already processed but not posted. • Replacing: Replacing process.4 C Debt Payment Balancing GL items used to configure the accounting entry related to this debt/payment creation. • Amountdebit: Debit amount • Amountcredit: Credit amount • C Glitem ID: General ledger item. 273/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. 33. • C Debt Payment Bal Replace ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Debt Payment ID: Refers to the amount of money to be paid or collected. • C Debt Payment ID: Refers to the amount of money to be paid or collected. • Amountdebit: Debit amount • Amountcredit: Credit amount • C Glitem ID: General ledger item. • C Debt Payment Balancing ID: GL items used to configure the accounting entry related to this debt/payment creation.33.

• Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed.33. C Order). the field is empty if you create a new document. the system will generate a document number for you. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing 274/461 . Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. If you leave the field empty. • C Doctype ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. If the document is not saved. • Datetrx: The Transaction Date indicates the date of the transaction. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice).g. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. • C Dp Management ID: Debt Payment Management allows to manage the changes of status of a debt/payment.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined.6 C DP Management Document in which status of a debt/payment can be modified. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿.

• C Dp Management ID: Debt Payment Management allows to manage the changes of status of a debt/payment. • Dateacct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record 33. • Status From: Initial status of the debt payment. • Status To: Is the status that debt payment has taken. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • CreateFrom: The Create From process will create a new document based on information in an existing document selected by the user.7 C DP ManagementLine Indicates the status change of a Debt Payment. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Dp Managementline ID: Indicates the status change of a Debt Payment. • C Debt Payment ID: Refers to the amount of money to be paid or collected.• User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 275/461 .

The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • C Remittance Parameter ID: Refers to the parameters needed to make a remittance.8 C Remittance Parameter Refers to the parameters needed to make a remittance.• Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Consolidate: When a remittance type is consolidated it will be created a cancel settlement from the debt/payments in the remittance and another one with the amount being the sum of all debt/payments. You cannot share data between Clients. 33. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Remittance Type ID: The remittance type defines the properties the remittance has.9 C Remittance Type Definition of types of remittances. • Content: Content • C Remittance Type ID: The remittance type defines the properties the remittance has. 276/461 . 33. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document.

• Status To: Is the status that debt payment has taken. You cannot share data between Clients.10 C Remittance Refers to a group of payments sent to the bank. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Settlement ID: Termination of a business operation by using its assets to discharge its liabilities. • Status Returned: The returned status is the status that will be taken by the debt/payment when it is returned. • Paymentruleconsolidated: Is the payment rule that will be applied for the consolidated debt/payments. • CreateFrom: The Create From process will create a new document based on information in an existing document selected by the user. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 277/461 . 33. • C Remittance ID: Refers to a group of payments sent to the bank. • C Bankaccount ID: The Bank Account identifies an account at this Bank. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • C Remittance Type ID: The remittance type defines the properties the remittance has. • Datetrx: The Transaction Date indicates the date of the transaction. • C Dp Management ID: Debt Payment Management allows to manage the changes of status of a debt/payment.

This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • Duedate: Date when the payment is due without deductions or discount • Getfile: Creates a File for the ebank.11 C RemittanceLine Refers to a payment sent to the bank. • C Remittance ID: Refers to a group of payments sent to the bank. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. If the document is not saved. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 33. You cannot share data between Clients. the field is empty if you create a new document.g. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. It takes the different parameters (including the docuemnt type) from the remittance type. • C Remittanceline ID: Refers to a group of payments sent to the bank. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record.• DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. • C Debt Payment ID: Refers to the amount of money to be paid or collected. the system will generate a document number for you. 278/461 . C Order). • C Debt Payment Cancelled: Generated debt payment that will cancel remittance line payment. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. If you leave the field empty.

279/461 .• Returned: If it is checked means that the debt/payment has been returned by the bank.

The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.34 Bank and Cash management It is necessary a Promissory format to print any Promissory Note with each Bank. Routing No and Swift Code • C Bank ID: The Bank is a unique identifier of a Bank for this Organization or for a Business Partner with whom this Organization transacts. It is used in routing checks and electronic transactions. You cannot share data between Clients. Each Bank is given an identifying Name. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Address. 280/461 . Bank is used to define the banks and accounts associated with an organization or business partner Cash Journal is used to record disbursements from and receipts to Petty Cash Cashbook defines the bank and account against which cash transactions will be processed. • RoutingNo: The Bank Routing Number (ABA Number) identifies a legal Bank. Process Bank Statements allows you to reconcile your Bank Statements.1 C Bank Defines a bank that is used by an organization or business partner. Charges defines the different charges that may be incurred. These can include Bank Charges. Not implemented yet • Codebank: First four numbers of the bank account number which identifies the bank uniquely. 34. Vendor Charges and Handling Charges. • SwiftCode: The SWIFT code is an identifier of a Bank Not implemented yet • IsOwnBank: The Own Bank field indicates if this bank is for this Organization as opposed to a Bank for a Business Partner. Not implemented yet • C Location ID: The Location / Address field defines the location of an entity.

281/461 Figure 34: Bank and Cash management .

• C BankAccount ID: The Bank Account identifies an account at this Bank. Customer. • Digitcontrol: Tenth number of the bank account. • INE Number: Number provided by the bank to configurate remittances. Employee or Salesperson 34. checking etc) this account is defined as. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • BankAccountType: The Bank Account Type field indicates the type of account (savings.2 C BankAccount Used to define one or more accounts for a Bank.• Codebranch: Second group of four numbers of the bank account which identifies the branch uniquely. • CreditLimit: The Credit Limit field indicates the credit limit for this account. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AccountNo: The Account Number indicates the Number assigned to this account • CurrentBalance: The Current Balance field indicates the current balance in this account. • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. 282/461 . Each account has a unique Account No and Currency. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Bank ID: The Bank is a unique identifier of a Bank for this Organization or for a Business Partner with whom this Organization transacts. This can include Vendor.

You cannot share data between Clients. • C BankAccount ID: The Bank is a unique identifier of a Bank for this Organization or for a Business Partner with whom this Organization transacts. Currently this format is prepared for the Spanish model. • C Promissoryformat ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Line2left: Distance from the left side for the 2nd line. • Line2top: Distance to the top for the 2nd line. 283/461 . • Digitcontrol: Tenth number of the bank account. • StmtProcessorClass: The Statement Processor Class indicates the Java Class to process bank statements • Codeaccount: Last ten numbers of the bank account. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Line1left: Distance from the left side for the 1st line. 34. • Line1top: Distance to the top for the 1st line.• IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value.3 C PromissoryFormat It is necessary a Promissory format to print any Promissory Note with each Bank.

• Line3left: Distance from the left side for the 3rd line. • Fontyearplanned: Font size for planned year field. • Fontdayplanned: Font size for planned day field. • Param41: Position for 1st parameter of 4th line. • Fontamount: Font size for amount field. • Line4top: Distance to the top for the 4th line. • Param12: Position for 2nd parameter of 1st line. • Param13: Position for 3rd parameter of 1st line. • Param11: Position for 1st parameter of 1st line. • Printbankloc: Specifies whether bank location is going to be printed. • Param42: Position for 2nd parameter of 4th line. 284/461 . • Line4left: Distance from the left side for the 4th line. • Param32: Position for 2nd parameter of 3rd line.• Line3top: Distance to the top for the 3rd line. • Param43: Position for 3rd parameter of 4th line. • Fontmonthplanned: Font size for planned month field. • Param31: Position for 1st parameter of 3rd line.

• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • StatementDate: The Statement Date field defines the date of the statement being processed. • Fontyeartoday: Font size for year to day field. You cannot share data between Clients.4 C BankStatement The Bank Statement Tab defines the Bank Statement to be reconciled. • BeginningBalance: The Beginning Balance is the balance prior to making any adjustments for payments or disbursements. • Fontmonthtoday: Font size for month to day field. • Fontamounttext: Font size for amount text field. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 34. • Fontdaytoday: Font size for day to day field. 285/461 . The statement defines all transactions that occurred • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • IsManual: The Manual check box indicates if the process will done manually. • C BankAccount ID: The Bank Account identifies an account at this Bank.• Fontpartnername: Font size for partner name field. • C BankStatement ID: The Bank Statement identifies a unique Bank Statement for a defined time period.

Charge) for the defined time period at this Bank.5 C BankStatementLine The Statement Line Tab defines the individual line items on the Bank Statement. You cannot share data between Clients. • C BankStatementLine ID: The Bank Statement Line identifies a unique transaction (Payment. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines 34. • IsReversal: The Reversal check box indicates if this is a reversal of a prior transaction. • C BankStatement ID: The Bank Statement identifies a unique Bank Statement for a defined time period. They can be entered manually or generated from payments entered. 286/461 . • CreateFrom: The Create From process will create a new document based on information in an existing document selected by the user. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • StatementDifference: The Statement Difference reflects the difference between the Statement Ending Balance and the Actual Ending Balance. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. Withdrawal.• EndingBalance: The Ending Balance is the result of adjusting the Beginning Balance by any payments or disbursements. The statement defines all transactions that occurred • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document.

Shipping. • Memo: Memo Text • ReferenceNo: The reference number can be printed on orders and invoices to allow your business partner to faster identify your records. • C Debt Payment ID: Refers to the amount of money to be paid or collected. • StmtAmt: The Statement Amount indicates the amount of a single statement line. • C Dp Management ID: Debt Payment Management allows to manage the changes of status of a debt/payment. Restocking) • ChargeAmt: The Charge Amount indicates the amount for an additional charge. • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • TrxAmt: The Transaction Amount indicates the amount for a single transaction. • C Debt Payment Create: Process to create a debt/payment. • ConvertChargeAmt: The Convert Charge Amount indicates the amount for an additional charge due to currency conversions. • C Charge ID: The Charge indicates a type of Charge (Handling.• ValutaDate: The Effective Date indicates the date that money is available from the bank. 287/461 .

• Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • C CashBook ID: The Cash Book identifies a unique cash book. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • StatementDifference: The Statement Difference reflects the difference between the Statement Ending Balance and the Actual Ending Balance. • StatementDate: The Statement Date field defines the date of the statement being processed. • C Cash ID: The Cash Journal uniquely identifies a Cash Journal. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The Cash Journal will record transactions for the cash bank account • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients.34.6 C Cash The Cash Journal Tab defines the parameters for this journal. The cash book is used to record cash transactions. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines 288/461 . • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • BeginningBalance: The Beginning Balance is the balance prior to making any adjustments for payments or disbursements. • EndingBalance: The Ending Balance is the result of adjusting the Beginning Balance by any payments or disbursements.

• AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). The cash book is used to record cash transactions. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. and inter-organization transactions. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. 34. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • C CashBook ID: The Cash Book identifies a unique cash book. You cannot share data between Clients. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. 289/461 .7 C CashBook The Cashbook Tab defines a unique cashbook for an organization. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Not implemented yet • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. with centralized services.

The Cash Journal will record transactions for the cash bank account • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • C Charge ID: The Charge indicates a type of Charge (Handling. You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 290/461 .8 C CashLine The Cash Line Tab defines the individual lines for this journal. • DiscountAmt: The Discount Amount indicates the discount amount for a document or line. • WriteOffAmt: The Write Off Amount indicates the amount to be written off as uncollectible. • C CashLine ID: The Cash Journal Line indicates a unique line in a cash journal. Restocking) • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • Amount: The Amount indicates the amount for this document line. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Cash ID: The Cash Journal uniquely identifies a Cash Journal. Shipping. • CashType: The Cash Type indicates the source for this Cash Journal Line.• C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record 34.

9 C Charge The Charge Tab defines the unique charges that may be associated with a document. 34. • C Debt Payment ID: Refers to the amount of money to be paid or collected. Not implemented yet • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Not implemented yet • ChargeAmt: The Charge Amount indicates the amount for an additional charge.• IsGenerated: The Generated checkbox identifies a journal line that was generated from a source document. Not implemented yet • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. Restocking) • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. For example. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. Not implemented yet • IsSameCurrency: Not implemented yet • C TaxCategory ID: The Tax Category provides a method of grouping similar taxes. You cannot share data between Clients. Not implemented yet • IsTaxIncluded: The Tax Included checkbox indicates if the prices include tax. Lines could also be entered manually or imported. Sales Tax or Value Added Tax. Not implemented yet 291/461 . Not implemented yet • IsSameTax: The Same Tax checkbox indicates that this charge should use the same tax as the main transaction. • C Charge ID: The Charge indicates a type of Charge (Handling. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. This is also known as the gross price. Shipping. • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order.

2 C Year The Year Window is used to define each year for the specified calendar. For example you may need a standard calendar that runs from Jan 1 to Dec 31 and a fiscal calendar that runs from July 1 to June 30.1 C Calendar The Calendar Tab defines each calendar that will be used by an Organization. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Year: The Year identifies the accounting year for a calendar. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You can also define non-standard calendars (e. For example you may need a standard calendar that runs from Jan 1 to Dec 31 and a fiscal calendar that runs from July 1 to June 30. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 35.35 Calendar. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 35. You cannot share data between Clients. 292/461 . Multiple calendars can be used. • C Year ID: The Year uniquely identifies an accounting year for a calendar. • C Calendar ID: The Calendar uniquely identifies an accounting calendar. Multiple calendars can be used. business year from July to June).g. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Calendar ID: The Calendar uniquely identifies an accounting calendar. Year and Period The Calendar Year and Periods defines the calendars that will be used for period control and reporting.

293/461 Figure 35: Calendar. Year and Period .

You cannot share data between Clients.• Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. Date ranges for a calendar and year cannot overlap. • Create Reg Fact Acct: Process to create regularization accounting entry. Each period begins on the defined Start Date and ends one day prior to the next period’s Start Date. • PeriodType: The Period Type indicates the type (Standard or Adjustment) of period. • StartDate: The Start Date indicates the first or starting date of a range. • C Year ID: The Year uniquely identifies an accounting year for a calendar. Each period is defined by a start and end date. Name and Start Date for each Calendar Year. 294/461 . • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Drop Reg Fact Acct: Process to drop regularization accounting entry. • PeriodNo: The Period No identifies a specific period for this year. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • C Period ID: The Period indicates an exclusive range of dates for a calendar.3 C Period The Period Tab defines a Period No. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • EndDate: The End Date indicates the last date in this range. 35.

’Never Opened’. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • C PeriodControl ID: The Period Control shows the status of a Period (Never Opened. Closed) for each of the DocBaseTypes.4 C PeriodControl The Period Control records the status of a Period (Never Opened. You cannot share data between Clients. For example ’Close Period’ or ’Open Period’. • C Period ID: The Period indicates an exclusive range of dates for a calendar. • PeriodStatus: The Period Status indicates the current status for this period.5 C NonBusinessDay The Non Business Days Tab defines those days to exclude when calculating the due date for given payment terms. Closed) for each of the DocBaseTypes. For example ’Closed’. Opened. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • PeriodAction: The Period Action indicates the action to be taken for this period. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.35. You cannot share data between Clients. 295/461 . • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 35. ’Open’. if an invoice terms was Net 10 days and the Invoice Date was 2/17/2000 the due date would be 2/27/2000. If 2/27/2000 was defined • C NonBusinessDay ID: The Non Business Day identifies a day that should not be considered a day when business is transacted • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Multiple document types may share a single document base type. For example. • DocBaseType: The Document Base Type identifies the base or starting point for a document. Opened.

• C Calendar ID: The Calendar uniquely identifies an accounting calendar. 296/461 . For example you may need a standard calendar that runs from Jan 1 to Dec 31 and a fiscal calendar that runs from July 1 to June 30. Multiple calendars can be used.• Date1: The Date field identifies a calendar date on which business will not be conducted.

• GAAP: The GAAP identifies the account principles that this accounting schema will adhere to.1 C AcctSchema The Accounting Schema Tab defines the controls used for accounting. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Not implemented yet 297/461 . currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Average) Not implemented yet • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • AutoPeriodControl: In the Automatic Period Control. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • IsAccrual: The Accrual checkbox indicates if this accounting schema will use accrual based account or cash based accounting. periods are opened and closed based on the current date. Each Organization will select an Accounting Schema to use. The Accrual method recognizes revenue when the product or service is delivered. If the Manual alternative is activated.36 Accounting Schema Accounting Schema defines an accounting method and the elements that will comprise an account structure. you have to open and close periods explicitly. 36. Cash based method recognizes income when then payment is received. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. Not implemented yet • CostingMethod: The Costing Method indicates how costs will be calculated (Standard. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.

298/461 Figure 36: Accounting Schema .

• C Period ID: The Period indicates an exclusive range of dates for a calendar. • Period OpenHistory: If Automatic Period Control is enabled, the current period is calculated based on the system date and you can always post to all days in the current period. History Days enable to post to previous periods. E.g. today is May 15th and History Days is set to 30, you can post back to April 15th Not implemented yet • Period OpenFuture: If Automatic Period Control is enabled, the current period is calculated based on the system date and you can always post to all days in the current period. Future Days enable to post to future periods. E.g. today is Apr 15th and Future Days is set to 30, you can post up to May 15th Not implemented yet • Separator: The Element Separator defines the delimiter printed between elements of the structure • HasAlias: The Alias checkbox indicates that account combination can be selected using a user defined alias or short key. Not implemented yet • HasCombination: The Combination Control checkbox indicates if the combination of account elements will be verified against the defined acceptable combination. Not implemented yet • IsTradeDiscountPosted: If the invoice is based on an item with a list price, the amount based on the list price and the discount is posted instead of the net amount.Example: Quantity 10 - List Price: 20 - Actual Price: 17If selected for a sales invoice 200 is posted to Produc Not implemented yet • IsDiscountCorrectsTax: Payment discounts may require to correct the tax. This primarily applicable in VAT systems. If the original invoice had tax records, the payment discount, write-off, etc. is corrected by the tax. The calculation of the tax is prorated based on the invoice. Not implemented yet

36.2

C AcctSchema Element

The Account Schema Element defines the elements that comprise the account key. A name is defined which will display in documents. Also the order of the elements and if they are balanced and mandatory are indicated. • C AcctSchema Element ID: The Account Schema Element defines each element that comprise the account key.

299/461

• C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method, currency and calendar • ElementType: The Element Type indicates if this element is the Account element or is a User Defined element. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • C Element ID: The Account Element uniquely identifies an Account Type. These are commonly known as a Chart of Accounts. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • IsMandatory: The Mandatory checkbox indicates if the field is required for a record to be save to the database. • IsBalanced: Needs to be balanced. • Org ID: An organization is a unit of your client or legal entity - examples are store, department. • C ElementValue ID: Account Elements can be natural accounts or user defined values. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This can include Vendor, Customer, Employee or Salesperson • C Location ID: The Location / Address field defines the location of an entity. • C SalesRegion ID: The Sales Region indicates a specific area of sales coverage.

300/461

• C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing

36.3

C AcctSchema Table

Group of tables that can be posted. • C Acctschema Table ID: Group of tables that can be posted. • C Acctschema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method, currency and calendar • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Acctdescription: SQL that will compose the description of the entries for this table when documents are posted.

36.4

C AcctSchema GL

The General Ledger defines error and balance handling to use as well as the necessary accounts for posting to General Ledger. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method, currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.

301/461

• UseSuspenseBalancing: Use Suspense Balancing • SuspenseBalancing Acct: Account used for suspense balancing • UseSuspenseError: Use Suspense Error • SuspenseError Acct: Accout used for suspense error • UseCurrencyBalancing: Use Currency Balancing • CurrencyBalancing Acct: The Currency Balancing Account indicates the account to used when a currency is out of balance (generally due to rounding) • RetainedEarning Acct: Account used for retained earning • IncomeSummary Acct: Account used for income summary • IntercompanyDueTo Acct: The Intercompany Due To Account indicates the account that represents money owed to other organizations. Not implemented yet • IntercompanyDueFrom Acct: The Intercompany Due From account indicates the account that represents money owed to this organization from other organizations. • PPVOffset Acct: Offset account for standard costing purchase price variances. The counter account is Product PPV.

36.5

C AcctSchema Default

Defines default accounts for an Accounting Schema. These values will display when a new document is opened. The user can override these defaults within the document. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method, currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.

302/461

• W Inventory Acct: The Warehouse Inventory Asset Account identifies the account used for recording the value of your inventory. • W InvActualAdjust Acct: In actual costing systems, this account is used to post Inventory value adjustments. You could set it to the standard Inventory Asset account. Not implemented yet • W Differences Acct: The Warehouse Differences Account indicates the account used recording differences identified during inventory counts. • W Revaluation Acct: The Inventory Revaluation Account identifies the account used to records changes in inventory value due to currency revaluation. • P Revenue Acct: The Product Revenue Account indicates the account used for recording sales revenue for this product. • P Expense Acct: The Product Expense Account indicates the account used to record expenses associated with this product. • P Asset Acct: The Product Asset Account indicates the account used for valuing this a product in inventory. • P PurchasePriceVariance Acct: The Purchase Price Variance is used in Standard Costing. It reflects the difference between the Standard Cost and the Purchase Order Price. Not implemented yet • P InvoicePriceVariance Acct: The Invoice Price Variance is used reflects the difference between the current Costs and the Invoice Price. Not implemented yet • P TradeDiscountRec Acct: The Trade Discount Receivables Account indicates the account for received trade discounts in vendor invoices Not implemented yet • P TradeDiscountGrant Acct: The Trade Discount Granted Account indicates the account for granted trade discount in sales invoices Not implemented yet • P Cogs Acct: The Product COGS Account indicates the account used when recording costs associated with this product.

303/461

• C Receivable Acct: The Customer Receivables Accounts indicates the account to be used for recording transaction for customers receivables. • C Prepayment Acct: The Customer Prepayment account indicates the account to be used for recording prepayments from a customer. Not implemented yet • V Liability Acct: The Vendor Liability account indicates the account used for recording transactions for vendor liabilities • V Liability Services Acct: The Vendor Service Liability account indicates the account to use for recording service liabilities. It is used if you need to distinguish between Liability for products and services Not implemented yet • V Prepayment Acct: The Vendor Prepayment Account indicates the account used to record prepayments from a vendor. Not implemented yet • PayDiscount Exp Acct: Indicates the account to be charged for payment discount expenses. Not implemented yet • WriteOff Acct: The Write Off Account identifies the account to book write off transactions to. • PayDiscount Rev Acct: Indicates the account to be charged for payment discount revenues. Not implemented yet • UnrealizedGain Acct: The Unrealized Gain Account indicates the account to be used when recording gains achieved from currency revaluation that have yet to be realized. Not implemented yet • UnrealizedLoss Acct: The Unrealized Loss Account indicates the account to be used when recording losses incurred from currency revaluation that have yet to be realized. Not implemented yet • RealizedGain Acct: The Realized Gain Account indicates the account to be used when recording gains achieved from currency revaluation that have been realized. Not implemented yet • RealizedLoss Acct: The Realized Loss Account indicates the account to be used when recording losses incurred from currency revaluation that have yet to be realized. Not implemented yet

304/461

• Withholding Acct: The Withholding Account indicates the account used to record withholdings. • E Prepayment Acct: The Employee Prepayment Account identifies the account to use for recording expense advances made to this employee. Not implemented yet • E Expense Acct: The Employee Expense Account identifies the account to use for recording expenses for this employee. Not implemented yet • PJ Asset Acct: The Project Asset account is the account used as the final asset account in capital projects Not implemented yet • PJ WIP Acct: The Work in Process account is the account used in capital projects until the project is completed • T Expense Acct: The Tax Expense Account indicates the account used to record the taxes that have been paid that cannot be reclaimed. Not implemented yet • T Liability Acct: The Tax Liability Account indicates the account used to record your tax liability declaration. Not implemented yet • T Receivables Acct: The Tax Receivables Account indicates the account used to record the tax credit amount after your tax declaration. Not implemented yet • T Due Acct: The Tax Due Account indicates the account used to record taxes that you are liable to pay. • T Credit Acct: The Tax Credit Account indicates the account used to record taxes that can be reclaimed • B InTransit Acct: The Bank in Transit Account identifies the account to be used for funds which are in transit. • B Asset Acct: The Bank Asset Account identifies the account to be used for booking changes to the balance in this bank account

305/461

• B Expense Acct: The Bank Expense Account identifies the account to be used for recording charges or fees incurred from this Bank. • B InterestRev Acct: The Bank Interest Revenue Account identifies the account to be used for recording interest revenue from this Bank. Not implemented yet • B InterestExp Acct: The Bank Interest Expense Account identifies the account to be used for recording interest expenses. Not implemented yet • B Unidentified Acct: The Bank Unidentified Receipts Account identifies the account to be used when recording receipts that can not be reconciled at the present time. Not implemented yet • B UnallocatedCash Acct: Receipts not allocated to Invoices Not implemented yet • B PaymentSelect Acct: AP Payment Selection Clearing Account • B SettlementGain Acct: The Bank Settlement Gain account identifies the account to be used when recording a currency gain when the settlement and receipt currency are not the same. Not implemented yet • B SettlementLoss Acct: The Bank Settlement loss account identifies the account to be used when recording a currency loss when the settlement and receipt currency are not the same. Not implemented yet • B RevaluationGain Acct: The Bank Revaluation Gain Account identifies the account to be used for recording gains that are recognized when converting currencies. • B RevaluationLoss Acct: The Bank Revaluation Loss Account identifies the account to be used for recording losses that are recognized when converting currencies. • Ch Expense Acct: The Charge Expense Account identifies the account to use when recording charges paid to vendors. • Ch Revenue Acct: The Charge Revenue Account identifies the account to use when recording charges paid by customers. Not implemented yet

306/461

• UnEarnedRevenue Acct: The Unearned Revenue indicates the account used for recording invoices sent for products or services not yet delivered. It is used in revenue recognition Not implemented yet • NotInvoicedReceivables Acct: The Not Invoiced Receivables account indicates the account used for recording receivables that have not yet been invoiced. Not implemented yet • NotInvoicedRevenue Acct: The Not Invoiced Revenue account indicates the account used for recording revenue that has not yet been invoiced. Not implemented yet • NotInvoicedReceipts Acct: The Not Invoiced Receipts account indicates the account used for recording receipts for materials that have not yet been invoiced. Not implemented yet • CB Asset Acct: The Cash Book Asset Account identifies the account to be used for recording payments into and disbursements from this cash book. • CB CashTransfer Acct: Account for Invoices paid by cash Not implemented yet • CB Differences Acct: The Cash Book Differences Account identifies the account to be used for recording any differences that affect this cash book • CB Expense Acct: The Cash Book Expense Account identifies the account to be used for general, non itemized expenses. • CB Receipt Acct: The Cash Book Receipt Account identifies the account to be used for general, non itemized cash book receipts. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • C Acctschema Default ID: Default accounts for an Accounting Schema. • Status: Status for the debt payment • A Accumdepreciation Acct: Accumulated Depreciation Account Not implemented yet • A Depreciation Acct: Depreciation account Not implemented yet 307/461

You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.• A Disposal Gain: Disposal Gain account Not implemented yet • A Disposal Loss: Disposal Loss account Not implemented yet 36. Allows user to configure his own accounting report. • Issummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. • Isshown: Element will be displayed. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. currency and calendar • Isreport: The Report checkbox indicates that this record is a report as opposed to a process 308/461 . • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.6 AD AccountingRpt Element Elements that will compose an accounting report. • AD Accountingrpt Element ID: Element that will be part of an accounting report. • Filteredbyorganization: • Temporaryfiltertype: • Account ID: The (natural) account used • C Acctschema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.

309/461 .• Report Type: Refers to the way that this report is gong to calculate the amount for this entry.

1 C Element The Element defines the Name. For example. Trees define roll ups or summary levels of information. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. They are used in reports for defining report points 310/461 . Additionally. You cannot share data between Clients. Not implemented yet • IsNaturalAccount: The natural account is often based on (industry specific) chart of accounts Not implemented yet • AD Tree ID: The Tree field identifies a unique Tree in the system. Balancing is not an option for the Account element. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 37. if cost centers have been defined as an element which is balance then the debits and credits for each unique cost center must net to 0. • VFormat: Value Format is the format the value will be displayed with. Each Account Schema must have an Account Element type.37 Account Element Account Combination defines and displays valid account combinations. a Type of Account or User Defined is selected. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. These are commonly known as a Chart of Accounts. • C Element ID: The Account Element uniquely identifies an Account Type. This is commonly used to define parts of an organization which report as their own entity. • ElementType: The Element Type indicates if this element is the Account element or is a User Defined element.00. The User Defined Elements are optional. • IsBalancing: The Balancing checkbox indicates the this element must balance in each journal transaction. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Description and Format for an Element. Account Element is used to define and maintain the Accounting Element and User Defined Elements.

311/461 Figure 37: Account Element .

R -Revenue and M. if any are applicable. Liability etc) and posting controls are also defined • C ElementValue ID: Account Elements can be natural accounts or user defined values. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. L . The account type is used to determine what taxes. If the Element is an Account Type then the Account Classification (Asset. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName.Liability. For example. For example. You cannot share data between Clients. Note: Memo account amounts are ignored when checking for balancing 312/461 . Not implemented yet • Add1Tree ID: The Additional Tree is used to define alternate roll ups which can be used in reporting. • AccountType: Valid account types are A . The values must conform to the format defined. If you leave the search key empty. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record.Owner Equity. • Add2Tree ID: The Additional Tree is used to define alternate roll ups which can be used in reporting. you may have a Business Partner Tree which rolls up based on geographic location and an additional tree which rolls up based on industry.and summarization levels. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. E . you may have a Business Partner Tree which rolls up based on geographic location and an additional tree which rolls up based on industry. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. validating payables and receivables for business partners.g.2 C ElementValue The individual valid values for the Element.Asset. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.Memo. the system automatically creates a numeric number. Not implemented yet 37. O.Expense. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. C Order).

• C BankAccount ID: The Bank Account identifies an account at this Bank. Not implemented yet • PostBudget: The Post Budget indicates if budget values can be posted to this element value. Not implemented yet • PostEncumbrance: Not implemented yet • PostStatistical: Not implemented yet • IsBankAccount: The Bank Account checkbox indicates if this is account is the bank account. • IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node.• AccountSign: Indicates if the expected balance for this account should be a Debit or a Credit. • IsDocControlled: Not implemented yet • C Element ID: The Account Element uniquely identifies an Account Type. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. • IsForeignCurrency: Balances in foreign currency accounts are held in the nominated currency and translated to functional currency • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record 313/461 . • ValidFrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range Not implemented yet • ValidTo: The Valid To date indicates the last day of a date range Not implemented yet • PostActual: The Post Actual indicates if actual values can be posted to this element value. These are commonly known as a Chart of Accounts.

• C ElementValue ID: Account Elements can be natural accounts or user defined values. • Sign: Sign applied to the operand to calculate the amount of the element value. • ElementLevel: Indicates the level of the account (heading. breakdown or subaccount). • Account ID: The (natural) account used • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 37. account. • ShowValueCond: Condition to show value. when algebraic it is always dilplayed.• ShowElement: Displays this element. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Elementvalue Operand ID: Operand used to calculate the amount of this element value.4 C ElementValue Trl Defines the translation of the element value to an alternate language • C ElementValue ID: Account Elements can be natural accounts or user defined values. when positive it is shown only if the amount is positive and when negative it is shown only if the amount is negative.3 C ElementValue Operand Indicates the operands used to calculate the amount of this element value. 37. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display 314/461 .

37. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. currency and calendar • Account ID: The (natural) account used 315/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. the Account Receivable Account for Garden World may be aliased as GW AR.5 C ValidCombination The Account Combination Tab defines and displays valid account combination. • Combination: The Combination field defines the unique combination of element values which comprise this account. • IsFullyQualified: The Fully Qualified check box indicates that all required elements for an account combination are present. • C ValidCombination ID: The Combination identifies a valid combination of element which represent a GL account. You cannot share data between Clients.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. An Alias can be defined to facilitate document entry. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. For example. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Alias: The Alias field allows you to define a alternate method for referring to a full account combination. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method.

and inter-organization transactions. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • C SalesRegion ID: The Sales Region indicates a specific area of sales coverage. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. • C LocTo ID: The Location To indicates the location that a product was moved to. with centralized services. This can include Vendor. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. Not implemented yet • C LocFrom ID: The Location From indicates the location that a product was moved from. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. 316/461 .• M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. Customer. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. Employee or Salesperson • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization).

These can include Bank Charges. Business Partner allows you to define any party with whom you transact. Update Name. Charges defines the different charges that may be incurred. 38. This includes customers. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. any Locators for that Warehouse and the Accounting parameters to be used for inventory in that Warehouse. The group of assets determines default accounts. currency and calendar • C BP Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners. defining margins and for easily assigning different accounting parameters for products. These groups can be used in generating Price Lists. Cashbook defines the bank and account against which cash transactions will be processed. Unit of Measure. etc. Accounting Schema defines an accounting method and the elements that will comprise an account structure.38 Accounting Maintain your Resources. in the Resource and don’t change it in the product. These default values can be modified for each business partner if required. Product Category you to define different groups of products. Product defines all products used by an organization. You cannot share data between Clients. vendors and employees. The product for the resource is automatically created and synchronized. Bank is used to define the banks and accounts associated with an organization or business partner Business Partner Group allows you to define the accounting parameters at a group level. These products include those sold to customers. Vendor Charges and Handling Charges. 317/461 . used in the manufacture of products sold to customers and products purchased by an organization. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.1 C BP Group Acct Defines the default accounts for any business partner that references this group. Project is used to define the projects which will be tracked via documents. Warehouse and Locators defines each Warehouse. Tax Rate defines the different taxes used for each tax category.

318/461 Figure 38: Accounting .

• UnrealizedGain Acct: The Unrealized Gain Account indicates the account to be used when recording gains achieved from currency revaluation that have yet to be realized. Not implemented yet • WriteOff Acct: The Write Off Account identifies the account to book write off transactions to. Not implemented yet • PayDiscount Exp Acct: Indicates the account to be charged for payment discount expenses. Not implemented yet • V Liability Acct: The Vendor Liability account indicates the account used for recording transactions for vendor liabilities • V Liability Services Acct: The Vendor Service Liability account indicates the account to use for recording service liabilities.• C Receivable Acct: The Customer Receivables Accounts indicates the account to be used for recording transaction for customers receivables. Not implemented yet • PayDiscount Rev Acct: Indicates the account to be charged for payment discount revenues. Not implemented yet • RealizedLoss Acct: The Realized Loss Account indicates the account to be used when recording losses incurred from currency revaluation that have yet to be realized. Not implemented yet • C Prepayment Acct: The Customer Prepayment account indicates the account to be used for recording prepayments from a customer. Not implemented yet • UnrealizedLoss Acct: The Unrealized Loss Account indicates the account to be used when recording losses incurred from currency revaluation that have yet to be realized. Not implemented yet • RealizedGain Acct: The Realized Gain Account indicates the account to be used when recording gains achieved from currency revaluation that have been realized. It is used if you need to distinguish between Liability for products and services Not implemented yet • V Prepayment Acct: The Vendor Prepayment Account indicates the account used to record prepayments from a vendor. Not implemented yet 319/461 .

2 C BP Customer Acct Defines the default accounts to use when this business partner is referenced on an accounts receivable transaction. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Bp Group Acct ID: Defines the default accounts for any business partner that references this group. You cannot share data between Clients. • Status: Status for the debt payment 38. • C Receivable Acct: The Customer Receivables Accounts indicates the account to be used for recording transaction for customers receivables. Not implemented yet • NotInvoicedReceivables Acct: The Not Invoiced Receivables account indicates the account used for recording receivables that have not yet been invoiced. It is used in revenue recognition Not implemented yet • NotInvoicedRevenue Acct: The Not Invoiced Revenue account indicates the account used for recording revenue that has not yet been invoiced. Not implemented yet • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. 320/461 . Employee or Salesperson • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. Not implemented yet • UnEarnedRevenue Acct: The Unearned Revenue indicates the account used for recording invoices sent for products or services not yet delivered. Customer. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This can include Vendor.• NotInvoicedReceipts Acct: The Not Invoiced Receipts account indicates the account used for recording receipts for materials that have not yet been invoiced.

• C Prepayment Acct: The Customer Prepayment account indicates the account to be used for recording prepayments from a customer. You cannot share data between Clients. Not implemented yet • C Bp Vendor Acct ID: Defines the default accounts to use when this business partner is referenced in an accounts payable transaction. currency and calendar • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.3 C BP Vendor Acct Defines the default accounts to use when this business partner is referenced in an accounts payable transaction. • Status: Status for the debt payment 321/461 . • V Liability Acct: The Vendor Liability account indicates the account used for recording transactions for vendor liabilities • V Liability Services Acct: The Vendor Service Liability account indicates the account to use for recording service liabilities. Customer. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. It is used if you need to distinguish between Liability for products and services Not implemented yet • V Prepayment Acct: The Vendor Prepayment Account indicates the account used to record prepayments from a vendor. Not implemented yet • C Bp Customer Acct ID: Default accounts to use when this business partner is referenced on an accounts receivable transaction. This can include Vendor. • Status: Status for the debt payment 38. Employee or Salesperson • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

• M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to.4 C BP Employee Acct Defines the default accounts to use when this business partner is referenced on a expense reimbursement. Product categories are used for pricing. You cannot share data between Clients. You cannot share data between Clients. Employee or Salesperson • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. Customer. Any product that uses a product category can inherit its default accounting parameters. • P Expense Acct: The Product Expense Account indicates the account used to record expenses associated with this product. Not implemented yet 38. This can include Vendor.5 M Product Category Acct Defines default accounting parameters. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • P Revenue Acct: The Product Revenue Account indicates the account used for recording sales revenue for this product. 322/461 . Not implemented yet • E Prepayment Acct: The Employee Prepayment Account identifies the account to use for recording expense advances made to this employee.38. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. • E Expense Acct: The Employee Expense Account identifies the account to use for recording expenses for this employee. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.

• P Asset Acct: The Product Asset Account indicates the account used for valuing this a product in inventory. You cannot share data between Clients. 323/461 . 38. Not implemented yet • P TradeDiscountRec Acct: The Trade Discount Receivables Account indicates the account for received trade discounts in vendor invoices Not implemented yet • P TradeDiscountGrant Acct: The Trade Discount Granted Account indicates the account for granted trade discount in sales invoices Not implemented yet • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. It reflects the difference between the Standard Cost and the Purchase Order Price.6 M Product Acct Defines the defaults to use when generating accounting transactions for documents which contain this product. Not implemented yet • P InvoicePriceVariance Acct: The Invoice Price Variance is used reflects the difference between the current Costs and the Invoice Price. • P Revenue Acct: The Product Revenue Account indicates the account used for recording sales revenue for this product. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • P PurchasePriceVariance Acct: The Purchase Price Variance is used in Standard Costing. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. Not implemented yet • P Cogs Acct: The Product COGS Account indicates the account used when recording costs associated with this product.

Not implemented yet • P InvoicePriceVariance Acct: The Invoice Price Variance is used reflects the difference between the current Costs and the Invoice Price. It reflects the difference between the Standard Cost and the Purchase Order Price. 324/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • P Asset Acct: The Product Asset Account indicates the account used for valuing this a product in inventory. Not implemented yet • P PurchasePriceVariance Acct: The Purchase Price Variance is used in Standard Costing. • T Due Acct: The Tax Due Account indicates the account used to record taxes that you are liable to pay. • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line.• P Expense Acct: The Product Expense Account indicates the account used to record expenses associated with this product. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. Not implemented yet • P TradeDiscountRec Acct: The Trade Discount Receivables Account indicates the account for received trade discounts in vendor invoices Not implemented yet • P TradeDiscountGrant Acct: The Trade Discount Granted Account indicates the account for granted trade discount in sales invoices Not implemented yet 38. Not implemented yet • P Cogs Acct: The Product COGS Account indicates the account used when recording costs associated with this product.7 C Tax Acct Defines the accounting parameters to be used for transactions referencing this Tax Rate.

Not implemented yet 325/461 . • B InterestRev Acct: The Bank Interest Revenue Account identifies the account to be used for recording interest revenue from this Bank. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. Not implemented yet • T Expense Acct: The Tax Expense Account indicates the account used to record the taxes that have been paid that cannot be reclaimed. You cannot share data between Clients.• T Liability Acct: The Tax Liability Account indicates the account used to record your tax liability declaration. Not implemented yet 38. • B Asset Acct: The Bank Asset Account identifies the account to be used for booking changes to the balance in this bank account • B Expense Acct: The Bank Expense Account identifies the account to be used for recording charges or fees incurred from this Bank. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C BankAccount ID: The Bank Account identifies an account at this Bank. • B InTransit Acct: The Bank in Transit Account identifies the account to be used for funds which are in transit. Not implemented yet • T Credit Acct: The Tax Credit Account indicates the account used to record taxes that can be reclaimed • T Receivables Acct: The Tax Receivables Account indicates the account used to record the tax credit amount after your tax declaration.8 C BankAccount Acct Defines the accounts used for transactions with this Bank.

Not implemented yet • B Unidentified Acct: The Bank Unidentified Receipts Account identifies the account to be used when recording receipts that can not be reconciled at the present time. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • B RevaluationLoss Acct: The Bank Revaluation Loss Account identifies the account to be used for recording losses that are recognized when converting currencies. You cannot share data between Clients.• B InterestExp Acct: The Bank Interest Expense Account identifies the account to be used for recording interest expenses. 326/461 . Not implemented yet • B SettlementLoss Acct: The Bank Settlement loss account identifies the account to be used when recording a currency loss when the settlement and receipt currency are not the same. 38. • C CashBook ID: The Cash Book identifies a unique cash book. Not implemented yet • B UnallocatedCash Acct: Receipts not allocated to Invoices Not implemented yet • B PaymentSelect Acct: AP Payment Selection Clearing Account Not implemented yet • B SettlementGain Acct: The Bank Settlement Gain account identifies the account to be used when recording a currency gain when the settlement and receipt currency are not the same. Not implemented yet • B RevaluationGain Acct: The Bank Revaluation Gain Account identifies the account to be used for recording gains that are recognized when converting currencies. The cash book is used to record cash transactions.9 C CashBook Acct Defines the accounting parameters for transaction involving a cashbook.

38. assets are created when delivering the asset.• CB Asset Acct: The Cash Book Asset Account identifies the account to be used for recording payments into and disbursements from this cash book. • CB Receipt Acct: The Cash Book Receipt Account identifies the account to be used for general. non itemized cash book receipts. non itemized expenses. • A Depreciation Acct: Depreciation account • A Accumdepreciation Acct: Accumulated Depreciation Account • A Disposal Loss: Disposal Loss account Not implemented yet • A Disposal Gain: Disposal Gain account Not implemented yet 327/461 . • CB CashTransfer Acct: Account for Invoices paid by cash • CB Differences Acct: The Cash Book Differences Account identifies the account to be used for recording any differences that affect this cash book • CB Expense Acct: The Cash Book Expense Account identifies the account to be used for general.10 A Asset Group Acct Defines the default accounts for any asset that references this group. If an asset group is selected in the product category. • A Asset Group ID: The group of assets determines default accounts. • C Acctschema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. You cannot share data between Clients. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

• Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. You cannot share data between Clients. especially that which could be converted to cash. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Restocking) • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. • C Charge ID: The Charge indicates a type of Charge (Handling. 38.11 A Asset Acct Defines the default accounts for this asset. • C Acctschema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. • A Depreciation Acct: Depreciation account • A Accumdepreciation Acct: Accumulated Depreciation Account • A Disposal Loss: Disposal Loss account Not implemented yet • A Disposal Gain: Disposal Gain account Not implemented yet 38. Shipping.12 C Charge Acct Defines the accounting parameters used for transactions including a charge or charges. • A Asset ID: Any item of economic value owned by the corporation. currency and calendar 328/461 .

• C Glitem ID: General ledger item. • Ch Revenue Acct: The Charge Revenue Account identifies the account to use when recording charges paid by customers. 329/461 . currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • PJ Asset Acct: The Project Asset account is the account used as the final asset account in capital projects Not implemented yet • PJ WIP Acct: The Work in Process account is the account used in capital projects until the project is completed Not implemented yet 38.13 C Project Acct The Accounting Tab is used to define the Asset Account to use when a project is completed and the associated asset realized. The Accounting Tab is used to define the Asset Account to use when a project is completed and the associated asset realized. • Ch Expense Acct: The Charge Expense Account identifies the account to use when recording charges paid to vendors. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. 38.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.14 C Glitem Acct Defines the default accounts for this general ledger item.

You cannot share data between Clients. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. • Glitem Credit Acct: Credit account for the general ledger item. You cannot share data between Clients. Not implemented yet 330/461 . • W Inventory Acct: The Warehouse Inventory Asset Account identifies the account used for recording the value of your inventory. 38.• C Acctschema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. Not implemented yet • W InvActualAdjust Acct: In actual costing systems. this account is used to post Inventory value adjustments.15 M Warehouse Acct Defines the Accounting parameters to be used for inventory in that Warehouse. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Not implemented yet • W Differences Acct: The Warehouse Differences Account indicates the account used recording differences identified during inventory counts. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. You could set it to the standard Inventory Asset account. • Glitem Debit Acct: Debit account for the general ledger item. • W Revaluation Acct: The Inventory Revaluation Account identifies the account used to records changes in inventory value due to currency revaluation.

Not implemented yet • P InvoicePriceVariance Acct: The Invoice Price Variance is used reflects the difference between the current Costs and the Invoice Price. It reflects the difference between the Standard Cost and the Purchase Order Price. These values will display when a new document is opened. • W InvActualAdjust Acct: In actual costing systems. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. • P Revenue Acct: The Product Revenue Account indicates the account used for recording sales revenue for this product. • P Asset Acct: The Product Asset Account indicates the account used for valuing this a product in inventory. The user can override these defaults within the document.16 C AcctSchema Default Defines default accounts for an Accounting Schema. • W Revaluation Acct: The Inventory Revaluation Account identifies the account used to records changes in inventory value due to currency revaluation. Not implemented yet 331/461 . You could set it to the standard Inventory Asset account. this account is used to post Inventory value adjustments. You cannot share data between Clients. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Not implemented yet • W Differences Acct: The Warehouse Differences Account indicates the account used recording differences identified during inventory counts. • P PurchasePriceVariance Acct: The Purchase Price Variance is used in Standard Costing.38. • P Expense Acct: The Product Expense Account indicates the account used to record expenses associated with this product. • W Inventory Acct: The Warehouse Inventory Asset Account identifies the account used for recording the value of your inventory.

Not implemented yet • WriteOff Acct: The Write Off Account identifies the account to book write off transactions to. • PayDiscount Rev Acct: Indicates the account to be charged for payment discount revenues. • C Prepayment Acct: The Customer Prepayment account indicates the account to be used for recording prepayments from a customer. It is used if you need to distinguish between Liability for products and services Not implemented yet • V Prepayment Acct: The Vendor Prepayment Account indicates the account used to record prepayments from a vendor.• P TradeDiscountRec Acct: The Trade Discount Receivables Account indicates the account for received trade discounts in vendor invoices Not implemented yet • P TradeDiscountGrant Acct: The Trade Discount Granted Account indicates the account for granted trade discount in sales invoices Not implemented yet • P Cogs Acct: The Product COGS Account indicates the account used when recording costs associated with this product. Not implemented yet 332/461 . Not implemented yet • UnrealizedGain Acct: The Unrealized Gain Account indicates the account to be used when recording gains achieved from currency revaluation that have yet to be realized. Not implemented yet • V Liability Acct: The Vendor Liability account indicates the account used for recording transactions for vendor liabilities • V Liability Services Acct: The Vendor Service Liability account indicates the account to use for recording service liabilities. • C Receivable Acct: The Customer Receivables Accounts indicates the account to be used for recording transaction for customers receivables. Not implemented yet • PayDiscount Exp Acct: Indicates the account to be charged for payment discount expenses.

Not implemented yet • RealizedGain Acct: The Realized Gain Account indicates the account to be used when recording gains achieved from currency revaluation that have been realized. Not implemented yet • RealizedLoss Acct: The Realized Loss Account indicates the account to be used when recording losses incurred from currency revaluation that have yet to be realized. Not implemented yet • T Due Acct: The Tax Due Account indicates the account used to record taxes that you are liable to pay. Not implemented yet • T Liability Acct: The Tax Liability Account indicates the account used to record your tax liability declaration. Not implemented yet • Withholding Acct: The Withholding Account indicates the account used to record withholdings. Not implemented yet • E Expense Acct: The Employee Expense Account identifies the account to use for recording expenses for this employee.• UnrealizedLoss Acct: The Unrealized Loss Account indicates the account to be used when recording losses incurred from currency revaluation that have yet to be realized. • E Prepayment Acct: The Employee Prepayment Account identifies the account to use for recording expense advances made to this employee. 333/461 . Not implemented yet • PJ Asset Acct: The Project Asset account is the account used as the final asset account in capital projects Not implemented yet • PJ WIP Acct: The Work in Process account is the account used in capital projects until the project is completed • T Expense Acct: The Tax Expense Account indicates the account used to record the taxes that have been paid that cannot be reclaimed. Not implemented yet • T Receivables Acct: The Tax Receivables Account indicates the account used to record the tax credit amount after your tax declaration.

Not implemented yet • B InterestExp Acct: The Bank Interest Expense Account identifies the account to be used for recording interest expenses. 334/461 .• T Credit Acct: The Tax Credit Account indicates the account used to record taxes that can be reclaimed • B InTransit Acct: The Bank in Transit Account identifies the account to be used for funds which are in transit. • B InterestRev Acct: The Bank Interest Revenue Account identifies the account to be used for recording interest revenue from this Bank. Not implemented yet • B Unidentified Acct: The Bank Unidentified Receipts Account identifies the account to be used when recording receipts that can not be reconciled at the present time. • B Asset Acct: The Bank Asset Account identifies the account to be used for booking changes to the balance in this bank account • B Expense Acct: The Bank Expense Account identifies the account to be used for recording charges or fees incurred from this Bank. Not implemented yet • B RevaluationGain Acct: The Bank Revaluation Gain Account identifies the account to be used for recording gains that are recognized when converting currencies. Not implemented yet • B SettlementLoss Acct: The Bank Settlement loss account identifies the account to be used when recording a currency loss when the settlement and receipt currency are not the same. Not implemented yet • B UnallocatedCash Acct: Receipts not allocated to Invoices Not implemented yet • B PaymentSelect Acct: AP Payment Selection Clearing Account • B SettlementGain Acct: The Bank Settlement Gain account identifies the account to be used when recording a currency gain when the settlement and receipt currency are not the same.

Not implemented yet • NotInvoicedRevenue Acct: The Not Invoiced Revenue account indicates the account used for recording revenue that has not yet been invoiced. • CB CashTransfer Acct: Account for Invoices paid by cash Not implemented yet • CB Differences Acct: The Cash Book Differences Account identifies the account to be used for recording any differences that affect this cash book • CB Expense Acct: The Cash Book Expense Account identifies the account to be used for general. • Ch Expense Acct: The Charge Expense Account identifies the account to use when recording charges paid to vendors. non itemized expenses. • Ch Revenue Acct: The Charge Revenue Account identifies the account to use when recording charges paid by customers. Not implemented yet • CB Asset Acct: The Cash Book Asset Account identifies the account to be used for recording payments into and disbursements from this cash book. 335/461 . It is used in revenue recognition Not implemented yet • NotInvoicedReceivables Acct: The Not Invoiced Receivables account indicates the account used for recording receivables that have not yet been invoiced.• B RevaluationLoss Acct: The Bank Revaluation Loss Account identifies the account to be used for recording losses that are recognized when converting currencies. non itemized cash book receipts. • CB Receipt Acct: The Cash Book Receipt Account identifies the account to be used for general. Not implemented yet • NotInvoicedReceipts Acct: The Not Invoiced Receipts account indicates the account used for recording receipts for materials that have not yet been invoiced. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. Not implemented yet • UnEarnedRevenue Acct: The Unearned Revenue indicates the account used for recording invoices sent for products or services not yet delivered.

• C Acctschema Default ID: Default accounts for an Accounting Schema. • Status: Status for the debt payment • A Accumdepreciation Acct: Accumulated Depreciation Account Not implemented yet • A Depreciation Acct: Depreciation account Not implemented yet • A Disposal Gain: Disposal Gain account Not implemented yet • A Disposal Loss: Disposal Loss account Not implemented yet 336/461 .

The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. manual journal or import • GL Category ID: The General Ledger Category is an optional.2 GL JournalBatch The GL Journal Batch Tab defines the control parameters for a Journal Batch. entered manually or imported. Journals can be generated from a document. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.39 General Ledger and Budget GL Category allows you to define categories to be used in journals. Multiple document types may share a single document base type. These categories provide a method of optionally grouping and reporting on journals. • GL JournalBatch ID: The General Ledger Journal Batch identifies a group of journals to be processed as a group. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. user defined method of grouping journal lines. 39. Each Category may be used on a document. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • CategoryType: The Category Type indicates the source of the journal for this category. 337/461 . • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. • DocBaseType: The Document Base Type identifies the base or starting point for a document. A Batch can consist of multiple Journals.1 GL Category The GL Category Tab defines optional identifiers for a document or journal. GL Journal allows you to enter and modify manual journal entries 39.

338/461 Figure 39: General Ledger and Budget .

• DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • C Period ID: The Period indicates an exclusive range of dates for a calendar. If you leave the field empty.g. • PostingType: The Posting Type indicates the type of amount (Actual. user defined method of grouping journal lines. • GL Category ID: The General Ledger Category is an optional. It may or may not be the same as the accounting date. the system will generate a document number for you. If the document is not saved. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. the field is empty if you create a new document.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Budget) this journal updated. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. Encumbrance. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. • DateDoc: The Document Date indicates the date the document was generated. C Order). • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • TotalDr: The Total Debit indicates the total debit amount for a journal or journal batch in the source currency • TotalCr: The Total Credit indicates the total credit amount for a journal or journal batch in the source currency 339/461 . This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). You cannot share data between Clients.

340/461 .• ControlAmt: If the control amount is zero. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. no check is performed. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. If you leave the field empty.g. • CopyFrom: Copy record lines • IsTemplate: Template is checked when the element is used as a template. the field is empty if you create a new document. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. You cannot share data between Clients. • GL Journal ID: The General Ledger Journal identifies a group of journal lines which represent a logical business transaction • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. currency and calendar • C DocType ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. the system will generate a document number for you. If the document is not saved. before the document is processed.Otherwise the total Debit amount must be equal to the control amount. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). 39.3 GL Journal The GL Journal Tab defines the control parameters for a single GL Journal.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. C Order).

• PostingType: The Posting Type indicates the type of amount (Actual. Encumbrance. use the Document Action field • DocAction: You find the current status in the Document Status field. If you want to change the document status. Budget) this journal updated. user defined method of grouping journal lines. It allows you to define multiple rates for the same to and from currency. • IsPrinted: The Printed checkbox indicates if this document or line will included when printing. Not implemented yet • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • GL Category ID: The General Ledger Category is an optional. • GL Budget ID: The General Ledger Budget identifies a user defined budget. For example you may have a set of rates used for daily transactions with a rate type of SPOT and rates for currency revaluation defined as REVAL.• DocStatus: The Document Status indicates the status of a document at this time. It may or may not be the same as the accounting date. • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • C Period ID: The Period indicates an exclusive range of dates for a calendar. 341/461 . • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • CurrencyRateType: The Conversion Rate Type indicates the type of rate to use when retrieving the conversion rate. These can be used in reporting as a comparison against your actual amounts. • DateDoc: The Document Date indicates the date the document was generated. The options are listed in a popup • IsApproved: The Approved checkbox indicates if this document requires approval before it can be processed.

• GL JournalLine ID: The General Ledger Journal Line identifies a single transaction in a journal.• CurrencyRate: The Currency Conversion Rate indicates the rate to use when converting the source currency to the accounting currency • GL JournalBatch ID: The General Ledger Journal Batch identifies a group of journals to be processed as a group. • GL Journal ID: The General Ledger Journal identifies a group of journal lines which represent a logical business transaction 342/461 . • TotalDr: The Total Debit indicates the total debit amount for a journal or journal batch in the source currency • TotalCr: The Total Credit indicates the total credit amount for a journal or journal batch in the source currency • ControlAmt: If the control amount is zero.4 GL JournalLine The GL Journal Line Tab defines the individual debit and credit transactions that comprise a journal. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines 39. before the document is processed.Otherwise the total Debit amount must be equal to the control amount. no check is performed. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

• CurrencyRate: The Currency Conversion Rate indicates the rate to use when converting the source currency to the accounting currency • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • AmtAcctDr: The Account Debit Amount indicates the transaction amount converted to this organization’s accounting currency • AmtAcctCr: The Account Credit Amount indicates the transaction amount converted to this organization’s accounting currency • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • CurrencyRateType: The Conversion Rate Type indicates the type of rate to use when retrieving the conversion rate. • IsGenerated: The Generated checkbox identifies a journal line that was generated from a source document. • AmtSourceDr: The Source Debit Amount indicates the credit amount for this line in the source currency. • AmtSourceCr: The Source Credit Amount indicates the credit amount for this line in the source currency. 343/461 . For example you may have a set of rates used for daily transactions with a rate type of SPOT and rates for currency revaluation defined as REVAL. It allows you to define multiple rates for the same to and from currency. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. Lines could also be entered manually or imported.• Line: Indicates the unique line for a document.

• Exportexcel: Process to export budget to excel file. • C Budgetline ID: The ID identifies a unique record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 344/461 . 39. sales or purchase budgets. • Copybudget: Process to copy a budget.6 C BudgetLine Refers to the lines associated to a budget. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • C Budget ID: Used to define the anticipated costs of doing business • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Year ID: The Year uniquely identifies an accounting year for a calendar. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients.• C ValidCombination ID: The Combination identifies a valid combination of element which represent a GL account. You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. They are used in reporting as a comparison to actual amounts. 39.5 C Budget The Budgets are used to define the anticipated costs of doing business. They can be financial. • Budget Type: Clasifies budgets.

345/461 . • C Period ID: The Period indicates an exclusive range of dates for a calendar. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • C Uom ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document.• C ValidCombination ID: The Combination identifies a valid combination of element which represent a GL account. with centralized services. Customer. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. Not implemented yet • C Salesregion ID: The Sales Region indicates a specific area of sales coverage. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. Employee or Salesperson • AD Orgtrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). and inter-organization transactions. • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. This can include Vendor. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination.

• M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. 346/461 . • Seqno: The Sequence indicates the order of records • C Bp Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners. • Price: The Price indicates the Price for a product or service.• User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • C Budget ID: Used to define the anticipated costs of doing business • Amount: The Amount indicates the amount for this document line. Product categories are used for pricing. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

40 Assets An asset is created by delivering a product. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. assets are created when delivering the asset. An asset can be used internally or be a customer asset. 40. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. especially that which could be converted to cash. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.g. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. You cannot share data between Clients. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. If a asset group is selected in the product category. • A Asset ID: Any item of economic value owned by the corporation. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. assets are created when delivering the asset. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.1 A Asset Any item of economic value owned by the corporation. If an asset group is selected in the product category. 347/461 . comment or help about the use of this item. The group of assets determines default accounts. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. If you leave the search key empty. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. especially that which could be converted to cash. • A Asset Group ID: The group of assets determines default accounts. C Order). the system automatically creates a numeric number.

348/461 Figure 40: Assets .

• GuaranteeDate: Date when the normal guarantee or availability expires • AssetServiceDate: The date when the asset was put into service .usually used as start date for depreciation. Customer.g. This can include Vendor. but the asset is legally owned by the organization • AssetDepreciationDate: Date of the last deprecation. • IsOwned: The asset may not be in possession. Employee or Salesperson • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner 349/461 . • UseLifeYears: Years of the usable life of the asset • UseLifeMonths: Months of the usable life of the asset • LifeUseUnits: Life use and the actual use may be used to calculate the depreciation • UseUnits: Currently used units of the assets • IsDisposed: The asset is no longer used and disposed • AssetDisposalDate: Date when the asset is/was disposed • IsInPosession: Assets which are not in possession are e. • LocationComment: • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. at Customer site and may or may not be owned by the company. if the asset is used internally and depreciated. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.

• IsDepreciated: The asset is used internally and will be depreciated • IsFullyDepreciated: The asset costs are fully amortized. It can only be used when the quantity is 1. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • Datepurchased: Date when this good was bougth. warranted product.• C Location ID: The Location / Address field defines the location of an entity. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • Assetvalueamt: Book Value of the asset • Residualassetvalueamt: Value of the asset once it has been totally depreciated. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • M AttributesetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • SerNo: The Serial Number identifies a tracked. • Datecancelled: Cancellation date • Amortizationstartdate: Date in which this asset starts depreciating • Amortizationenddate: Date in which this asset ends depreciating • Annualamortizationporcentage: Anual percentage used to depreciate this asset. 350/461 . • Lot: The Lot Number indicates the specific lot that a product was part of. • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system.

• Depreciatedplan: Value that is planned to be depreciated. If you leave the field empty.• VersionNo: Version Number • Acctvalueamt: Accounting value amount • Amortizationtype: Indicates the method used to depreciate this asset.. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. • Profit: • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. If the document is not saved. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • Cause: • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. • Amortizationcalctype: This field indicates how depreciation will be calculated: choosing the time or the percentage. C Order). • Amortizationvalueamt: Accumulate depreciation amount • Assetschedule: Refers to the periods chosen between depreciation entries (monthly. yearly.g. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). the field is empty if you create a new document.). the system will generate a document number for you.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed.. Not implemented yet • Depreciatedpreviousamt: 351/461 .

• Help: The Help field contains a hint.2 A Asset Group The group of assets determines default accounts. comment or help about the use of this item. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. but the asset is legally owned by the organization • IsDepreciated: The asset is used internally and will be depreciated 40. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients. 352/461 . • A Asset Group ID: The group of assets determines default accounts. assets are created when delivering the asset. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. If an asset group is selected in the product category. assets are created when delivering the asset.• Depreciatedvalue: Is the value depreciated from processed amortizations. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. If a asset group is selected in the product category. You cannot share data between Clients. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.3 A Amortization Refers to all the depreciations ocurred btween two dates • A Amortization ID: Refers to all the depreciations ocurred btween two dates • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • IsOwned: The asset may not be in possession. 40.

• C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination.• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • Totalamortization: Total Amortization amount 353/461 . Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. • Enddate: The End Date indicates the last date in this range. • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • Startdate: The Start Date indicates the first or starting date of a range. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. You can then report based on a specific Campaign.

• Amortization Porcentage: Amortization Percentage • Amortizationamt: Amortization Amount • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record 354/461 . You cannot share data between Clients.4 A Amortizationline Depreciation of an asset between two dates • A Amortizationline ID: Depreciation of an asset between two dates • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. especially that which could be converted to cash. • A Asset ID: Any item of economic value owned by the corporation.40. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • A Amortization ID: Refers to all the depreciations ocurred btween two dates • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document.

• Record ID: The Record ID is the internal unique identifier of a record • Line ID: Internal link • GL Category ID: The General Ledger Category is an optional. • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • C Period ID: The Period indicates an exclusive range of dates for a calendar. currency and calendar • Account ID: The (natural) account used • DateTrx: The Transaction Date indicates the date of the transaction. • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside.41 Accounting Facts Query the detail accounting transactions 41. • Fact Acct ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Deprecated 355/461 .1 Fact Acct Recods accounting entries of all accounting schemas. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. You cannot share data between Clients. • GL Budget ID: The General Ledger Budget identifies a user defined budget. user defined method of grouping journal lines. These can be used in reporting as a comparison against your actual amounts.

356/461 Figure 41: Accounting Facts .

and inter-organization transactions. Customer.• C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line. Not implemented yet 357/461 . Budget) this journal updated. • AmtAcctDr: The Account Debit Amount indicates the transaction amount converted to this organization’s accounting currency • AmtAcctCr: The Account Credit Amount indicates the transaction amount converted to this organization’s accounting currency • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. Encumbrance. This can include Vendor. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. Employee or Salesperson • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). • PostingType: The Posting Type indicates the type of amount (Actual. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • AmtSourceDr: The Source Debit Amount indicates the credit amount for this line in the source currency. with centralized services. • AmtSourceCr: The Source Credit Amount indicates the credit amount for this line in the source currency. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.

• User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • C SalesRegion ID: The Sales Region indicates a specific area of sales coverage. • A Asset ID: Any item of economic value owned by the corporation. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. especially that which could be converted to cash. • C LocTo ID: The Location To indicates the location that a product was moved to. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.• C LocFrom ID: The Location From indicates the location that a product was moved from. Not implemented yet 358/461 .

• Secondaryunit: Is an optional unit to define the number of times that is desired to perform the process. • Explodephases: Indicates if the work requirement phases will be generated automatically. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.g. Primary quantity = (secondary quantity)/(conversion rate) • Copyversion: Process which from a selected reference version copies it into a new one changing the correspondent time periods. • MA Processplan ID: Indicates a process plan. If you leave the search key empty. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. the system automatically creates a numeric number. 42.1 MA ProcessPlan In this table is defined the header of the process plan. • Conversionrate: It is the rate between primary unit and secondary unit. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 359/461 . C Order).42 Manufacturing: Process Plan A process plan is a set of sequences or processes that elaborates one or more diferent products. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. You cannot share data between Clients.

360/461 Figure 42: Manufacturing: Process Plan .

where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. the system will generate a document number for you. • Datefrom: The Date From indicates the starting date of a range. If the document is not saved. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. the field is empty if you create a new document. • MA Processplan Version ID: Indicates a process plan version. • MA Processplan ID: Indicates a process plan. • MA Sequence ID: The sequence relates the operations with the process plan. 361/461 .If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. You cannot share data between Clients.g.42. If you leave the field empty. C Order). You cannot share data between Clients. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. • MA Process ID: Indicates a manufacturing process of the enterprise.3 MA Sequence In the Sequence table there are defined all the processes that belongs to the selected process plan. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). • Dateto: The Date To indicates the end date of a range (inclusive) 42.2 MA ProcessPlan Version This table allows different production plan versions • MA Processplan Version ID: Indicates a process plan version. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

usage products (grouoped by product)&nbsp.by running the &quot.sequence in order to satisfy the complete process plan. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. work requirement phase or production run. • CostCenterUse: ¡p¿The duration of this sequence in hours.• Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. • Multiplier: ¡p¿Number of times needed to run this&nbsp. If you prefer having the total&nbsp.as specified in&nbsp.&nbsp.g.the work requirement phases. the system automatically creates a numeric number. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.generating standards&quot. • Calculated: Indicates that the record has been calculated. the quantities will not be filled in and will be set to zero. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. If you leave the search key empty.for all production runs in Global Use tab.¡/p¿ • Groupuse: Each work effort can have several production runs. Not implemented yet • Outsourced: Indicates that the correspondent process is being outsourced for the sequence.¡/p¿ • Seqno: The Sequence indicates the order of records • Noqty: ¡p¿When&nbsp.are automatically filled in&nbsp.¡/p¿ ¡p¿If this is checked.the same product in several ones.creating a production run. You can use (consume)&nbsp. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.¡/p¿ • Preptime: Preparation time needed in hours. process required input and output product quantities&nbsp. check this box. C Order). 362/461 .

• C Salary Category ID: Indicates a salary category • Calccost: Is the calculated cost amount. 363/461 . • MA Sequence Employee ID: Indicates each salary category standard cost amount for a sequence. 42. You cannot share data between Clients. • Calccost: Is the calculated cost amount. you need to input the standard outsourcing cost here. • MA Indirect Cost ID: Indicates an indirect cost.4 MA Sequence Employee Table where is stored information about the salary costs of the standard cost calculation. You cannot share data between Clients. • MA Sequence Ic ID: Indicates an indirect standard cost amount for a sequence.5 MA Sequence IC Table where is stored each indirect standard cost amount for a sequence. • MA Sequence ID: The sequence relates the operations with the process plan.¡/p¿ 42. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MA Sequence ID: The sequence relates the operations with the process plan.• Outsourcingcost: ¡p¿If the sequence of a Process Plan is outsourced.

You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.a negative productions refers to an input product. There must be defined both the raw materials and the generated products. A positive production means that is an output product. • C Uom ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure 364/461 . 42.7 MA SequenceProduct In this table there are defined all the products involved in the sequence. • MA Sequenceproduct ID: Indicates each product involved on a sequence. So&nbsp. • Quantity: Indicates the quantity of product needed to process one time the sequence. • Productiontype: Indicates if the product is used in the sequence or is generated. • MA Sequence Machine ID: Indicates each machine standard cost amount for a sequence. • Calccost: Is the calculated cost amount. • MA Sequence ID: The sequence relates the operations with the process plan.42. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. You cannot share data between Clients. • MA Sequence ID: The sequence relates the operations with the process plan. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MA Machine ID: Indicates a machine of the enterprise.6 MA Sequence Machine Table where is stored each machine standard cost amount for a sequence.

• Componentcost: Cost per component • Rminput: Custom code. 365/461 . • Rejected: Percentage of parts rejected • Consumerm: Custom code. • M Product Uom ID: Alternative order uom for the product.• Quantityorder: Product quantity in the order uom. Deprecated • Cost: Cost amount. Deprecated • Decreaseind: Custom code. Deprecated • Decrease: Percentage of decrease.

1 MA WorkRequirement In this table it’s defined the header of the requirement. • Closed: Indicates if the work requirement phase has been completely done. • Launchdate: The Launch Date indicates the date that the work requiremente was made. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Quantity: Indicates the quantity of product needed to process one time the sequence. • Explote: Process to explode the phases and/or insert the correspondent products to them. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 43. Not implemented yet • MA Processplan ID: Indicates a process plan.43 Manufacturing: Work Requirement Work requirement defines all the manufacturing needs of the process plans. • MA Workrequirement ID: Indicates a work requirement. • Enddate: The End Date indicates the last date in this range. • Startdate: The Start Date indicates the first or starting date of a range. here it’s indicated for example the process plan. 366/461 .

367/461 Figure 43: Manufacturing: Work Requirement .

where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.• DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. 368/461 . The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. • Secondaryqty: Secondary quantity.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. • MA Wrphase ID: Indicates a Work Requirement Phase. Deprecated 43.g. • Explodephases: Indicates if the work requirement phases will be generated automatically. • Secondaryunit: Is an optional unit to define the number of times that is desired to perform the process. the field is empty if you create a new document. If the document is not saved.process plan. the system will generate a document number for you. • MA Workrequirement ID: Indicates a work requirement. You cannot share data between Clients. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. • Conversionrate: It is the rate between primary unit and secondary unit. Each phase corresponds to a sequence of the selected&nbsp. C Order). Primary quantity = (secondary quantity)/(conversion rate) • WrType: Custom code. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice).2 MA WRPhase In this table there are defined the diferent phases of the work requirement. • MA Process ID: Indicates a manufacturing process of the enterprise. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. If you leave the field empty.

process required input and output product quantities&nbsp. • Outsourced: Indicates that the correspondent process is being outsourced for the sequence.by running the &quot.are automatically filled in&nbsp.the same product in several ones.generating standards&quot. • Donequantity: Indicates the number of times that the work requirement phase has been allready processed. You can use (consume)&nbsp. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • CostCenterUse: ¡p¿The duration of this sequence in hours. • Seqno: The Sequence indicates the order of records • Noqty: ¡p¿When&nbsp. Not implemented yet • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • MA Sequence ID: The sequence relates the operations with the process plan.• Quantity: Indicates the quantity of product needed to process one time the sequence.as specified in&nbsp.usage products (grouoped by product)&nbsp. 369/461 .¡/p¿ • Preptime: Preparation time needed in hours. If you prefer having the total&nbsp. check this box. Not implemented yet • Closed: Indicates if the work requirement phase has been completely done.¡/p¿ • Groupuse: Each work effort can have several production runs. the quantities will not be filled in and will be set to zero.for all production runs in Global Use tab. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.¡/p¿ ¡p¿If this is checked.creating a production run.&nbsp. work requirement phase or production run.the work requirement phases.

a negative productions refers to an input product. • Movementqty: The Movement Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that has been moved.43. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • M Product Uom ID: Alternative order uom for the product. There must be defined both the raw materials and the generated products. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. Not implemented yet • MA Wrphase ID: Indicates a Work Requirement Phase. • Productiontype: Indicates if the product is used in the sequence or is generated. You cannot share data between Clients. A positive production means that is an output product.3 MA WRPhaseProduct In this tab there are defined all the products involved in the work requirement phase. So&nbsp. • C Uom ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • Quantityorder: Product quantity in the order uom. • Consumerm: Custom code. Deprecated • Decreaseind: Custom code. Deprecated 370/461 . • MA Wrphaseproduct ID: Indicates each product involved in the work requirement phase.

• MA Pl Ic ID: Indicates the indirect costs involved on each production run. • M Productionplan ID: The Production Plan identifies the items and steps in generating a product. • M Productionplan ID: The Production Plan identifies the items and steps in generating a product. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MA Pl Employee ID: Indicates the employees of each salary category involved on each production run. Among produced and used products is stored all related data for the costs calculation.44 Manufacturing: Work Effort In work effort is stored the work efforts that the employees have done during their work day. 371/461 . 44.1 MA PL Employee In this table are the employees of each salary category involved on each production run. • C Salary Category ID: Indicates a salary category • Quantity: Indicates the quantity of product needed to process one time the sequence. You cannot share data between Clients. • Costuom: Unit of Measure for cost 44. You cannot share data between Clients.2 MA PL IC In this table are stored the indirect costs involved on each production run.

372/461 Figure 44: Manufacturing: Work Effort .

• M Productionplan ID: The Production Plan identifies the items and steps in generating a product. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MA Pl Machine ID: Indicates the machine costs involved on each production run.• MA Indirect Cost ID: Indicates an indirect cost. 44. • MA Machine ID: Indicates a machine of the enterprise. • C Invoiceline ID: The Invoice Line uniquely identifies a single line of an Invoice. • Use: Indicates the use coefficient. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. 44.3 MA PL InvoiceLine In this table are stored the invoice lines involved on each production run.4 MA PL Machine In this table are stored the machine costs involved on each production run. 373/461 . • Cost: Cost amount. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Productionplan ID: The Production Plan identifies the items and steps in generating a product. • MA Pl Invoiceline ID: Indicates the invoice lines involved on each production run.

• MA Weemployee ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Customer. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. You cannot share data between Clients. • Endtime: End time in hours. • M Production ID: The Production uniquely identifies a Production Plan • MA Incidence ID: Unique identifier for incidence • Starttime: Start time in hours. • M Production ID: The Production uniquely identifies a Production Plan • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.6 MA WEIncidence In this table are all the incidences that may have happened. You cannot share data between Clients. • MA Weincidence ID: Indicates each incidence of a work effort. This can include Vendor.44. Employee or Salesperson 44. 374/461 . • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.5 MA WEEmployee In this table are introduced all the employees that have participate on the work effort.

7 M Production Contains the header of the work effort • M Production ID: The Production uniquely identifies a Production Plan • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MovementDate: The Movement Date indicates the date that a product moved in or out of inventory. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. This is the result of a shipment. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record.44. You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). 375/461 . • IsCreated: Check to indicate that the records has been created and the production is ready to be processed. and inter-organization transactions. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. with centralized services. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. receipt or inventory movement.

You cannot share data between Clients. If you leave the field empty.g. 44.• C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. If the document is not saved. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. • Issotrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. • Endtime: End time in hours. C Order). the field is empty if you create a new document.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. • Starttime: Start time in hours. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. the system will generate a document number for you. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document.8 M ProductionLine Contains all the products that have been used or created in the production run and the quantities • M ProductionLine ID: The Production Line indicates the production document line (if applicable) for this transaction • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 376/461 . This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). • Validating: Process to validate the work effort.

It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • PrintLabel: Process to print labels for the product. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • Secquality: Custom code. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.a negative productions refers to an input product.• M ProductionPlan ID: The Production Plan identifies the items and steps in generating a product. • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. Deprecated 377/461 . Custom code. So&nbsp. • Rejectedquantity: How many products have been rejected. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. • MovementQty: The Movement Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that has been moved. • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • M Product Uom Id: Alternative order uom for the product. Deprecated • Calculated: Indicates that the record has been calculated. A positive production means that is an output product. • QuantityOrder: Product quantity in the order uom. • Productiontype: Indicates if the product is used in the sequence or is generated.

• MA Wrphase ID: Indicates a Work Requirement Phase.44.9 M ProductionPlan Contains the items used and generated in a production • M ProductionPlan ID: The Production Plan identifies the items and steps in generating a product. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • ProductionQty: The Production Quantity identifies the number of products to produce • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. • Neededquantity: How many times it is necessary to complete a phase before closing it. • Realcost: Real Cost 378/461 . Primary quantity = (secondary quantity)/(conversion rate) • MA Costcenteruse: Use of the cost center. You cannot share data between Clients. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Conversionrate: It is the rate between primary unit and secondary unit. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • M Production ID: The Production uniquely identifies a Production Plan • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document.

• Secondaryqty: Secondary quantity. When the work effort is processed the global use products are distributed proportionaly. • Usedmaterial: Process to generate standards on production run. • Secondaryunit: Is an optional unit to define the number of times that is desired to perform the process. • MA Globaluse ID: Identifies a globally used product in the work effort. You cannot share data between Clients. • MA Costcenter Version ID: Identifies a cost center version valid during a time period. • Outsourced: Indicates that the correspondent process is being outsourced for the sequence. • M Production ID: The Production uniquely identifies a Production Plan • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.10 MA GlobalUse This tabs contains global consume products. work requirement phase or production run. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • M Product Uom ID: Alternative order uom for the product. 44. 379/461 . • C Uom ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • Movementqty: The Movement Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that has been moved.• Rejectedquantity: How many products have been rejected.

• Quantityorder: Product quantity in the order uom. • M Attributesetinstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes 380/461 . • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located.

With the stations there are indicated the diferent machines that compose it. Toolset defines different toolset registration for further use on the production. • MA Toolset ID: Toolset • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MA Toolsetprocess ID: Toolset Process 381/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. the system automatically creates a numeric number. • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located.1 MA Toolset The Toolset tab is used to detail the different types of toolsets that each company has.45 Manufacturing: Toolset Work Station defines the diferent work stations of the enterprise. If you leave the search key empty.g. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. 45. • Numberuses: Number of uses of the toolset • Discarded: Indicates that it’s no longer used. 45. C Order). the processes that are done in the station and the toolsets used in each process.2 MA ToolsetProcess In case that are needed in this tab are introduced the diferent toolset used in the selected process. • MA Toolset Type ID: Indicates a Toolset Type of the enterprise. In case that are needed in this tab are introduced the diferent toolset used in the selected process. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.

382/461 Figure 45: Manufacturing: Toolset .

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.4 MA ToolsetUsed In this tab are introduced the diferent toolset used in the production run. • Usecycle: Indicates the number of years that it’s useful 45. You cannot share data between Clients. 45. You cannot share data between Clients. • MA Toolset Type ID: Indicates a Toolset Type of the enterprise. 383/461 .3 MA Toolset Type The Toolset Type tab is used to detail the different types of toolsets that exist. • MA Process ID: Indicates a manufacturing process of the enterprise. • Usecoef: Coefficient of use that indicates the number of time that the toolset is used while the work requirement phase is processed once. • MA Toolset Type ID: Indicates a Toolset Type of the enterprise. • MA Toolset ID: Toolset • M ProductionPlan ID: The Production Plan identifies the items and steps in generating a product.

• MA Toolsetused ID: Indicates the toolsets used in the production run. • Used: Number of uses of the toolset in the production run. You cannot share data between Clients. 384/461 .• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Datadate: Date when the data was taken. • MA Pc Case ID: Identifies each instance of a periodic control. You cannot share data between Clients. 46. • TestResult: Description of the test results. You cannot share data between Clients. 385/461 .2 MA PC Value This tab registrates the planned periodic control values • MA Pc Value ID: Identifies each result of a test in a periodic control case. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.46 Manufacturing: Periodic Control Periodic Control defines the diferent set of tests that can be defined to perform periodically. 46. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • MA Pc Test ID: Identifies each test done in a periodic control. There are also stored the results of the tests for the different sets.1 MA Periodic Control This tab is used for periodic control definition. • MA Periodic Control ID: Identifies a periodic control. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

386/461 Figure 46: Manufacturing: Periodic Control .

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Days: Delay in days from the beginning of the case to perform the test. • MA Periodic Control ID: Identifies a periodic control. • MA Periodic Control ID: Identifies a periodic control. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 387/461 . • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.4 MA PC Case This tab contains each periodic control realized. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.46.3 MA PC Test This tab contains each of the test that conforms the periodic control • MA Pc Test ID: Identifies each test done in a periodic control. You cannot share data between Clients. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • MA Pc Case ID: Identifies each instance of a periodic control. You cannot share data between Clients. • Startdate: The Start Date indicates the first or starting date of a range. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 46. • M Attributesetinstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.

• Launched: Indicates that the case has been launched.• Enddate: The End Date indicates the last date in this range. 388/461 .

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.47 Manufacturing: Critical Control Points Critical Control Points are points that are measured during productions. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. 47. • Critical: Indicates that the point is critical and/or mandatory • Valuetype: Set the value type expected for the point. • Valuenumber: Set the number of times that the point is measured each gathering. Possible options are: Yes/No. • Seqno: The Sequence indicates the order of records 47. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 389/461 .1 MA CCP This tab contains each of the measures that will be controled.2 MA CCP Group Allows the CCP grouping • MA CCP Group ID: Identifies a group of critical control points. • MA Ccp ID: Identifies each measured critical control point. • MA CCP Group ID: Identifies a group of critical control points. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. String or Number.

390/461 Figure 47: Manufacturing: Critical Control Points .

Deprecated 47. • Starttime: Start time in hours. • MA Ccp Group ID: Identifies a group of critical control points. You cannot share data between Clients. Available options are morning and swing shift 391/461 . • MA Ccp Shift ID: Identifies a time schedule in a shift of a critical control point group. Custom code. • Endtime: End time in hours. • Shift: Indicates the shift when the group is going to be measured. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Frecuency: Time period between measure gathering. • Seqno: The Sequence indicates the order of records • Hassecproduct: Indicates that the group has a secondary product.3 MA CCP Shift Defines the intervals where the control points are measured for each shift. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

Deprecated • Seqno: The Sequence indicates the order of records • Hassecproduct: Indicates that the group has a secondary product. • MA Measure Shift ID: Indicates a measure shift of critical control points.4 MA Measure Group This tab contains the CCP data registered on this group • MA Measure Group ID: Indicates the groups that are measured in the measure shift. You cannot share data between Clients. Custom code. • Lot: The Lot Number indicates the specific lot that a product was part of. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Shift: Indicates the shift when the group is going to be measured. Deprecated 47. Deprecated • Product: Is the product that is being measured. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MA CCP Group ID: Identifies a group of critical control points. Custom code. Custom code. • Product: Is the product that is being measured.5 MA Measure Shift This tab defines the shift and date in which the gathering is done • MA Measure Shift ID: Indicates a measure shift of critical control points. Available options are morning and swing shift • Measuredate: Date when the measures are taken. Deprecated 392/461 .47. Custom code.

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Measurehour: Time when the gathering was made.6 MA Measure Time This tab defines the time of the gathering. You cannot share data between Clients.• Sellbydate: Custom code. 393/461 . • Explode: Process to insert all the necessary measure values of the measured group. • MA Measure Group ID: Indicates the groups that are measured in the measure shift. Deprecated • Observation: Observations occurred during the process or operation. 47.7 MA Measure Values In this table gathering values are registered. • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. 47. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • Edit: Edit measures of CCP • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • MA Measure Values ID: Identifies each value measured in a measure time. • MA Measure Time ID: Identifies the time of the data gathering.

• V Number: Result of the measure in numeric format. • V String: Result of the measure in text format. You cannot share data between Clients. • MA Ccp ID: Identifies each measured critical control point. • V Char: Yes/No result of the measure. • Valuetype: Set the value type expected for the point. • Seqno: The Sequence indicates the order of records 394/461 . Possible options are: Yes/No. String or Number. • MA Measure Time ID: Identifies the time of the data gathering.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

• MA Maintenance ID: Identifies a maintenance of a machine or machine type. They are escheduled and in the maintenance part are stored the results of the maintenances. corrective (urgent) and preventive. • MA Maint Operation ID: Identifies a maintenance operation. 395/461 . • Explode: Indicates that the maintenance defined for a machine group is exploded to all its machines when is scheduled. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • MA Machine ID: Indicates a machine of the enterprise. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 48.48 Manufacturing: Maintenance Maintenances can be set for machines and machine types.1 MA Maintenance Stores maintenances that are done to the machines. • Plannedtime: Estimated time for the operation. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • MA Machine Type ID: Identifies a machine type. You cannot share data between Clients. available options are corrective. • Maintenance Type: Sets the maintenance type. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

396/461 Figure 48: Manufacturing: Maintenance .

• Partdate: Date of the part. Available options are morning and swing shift • CreateMaint: Process to insert in the part the scheduled maintenances. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Shift: Indicates the shift when the group is going to be measured.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. If you leave the field empty. 397/461 .48.3 MA Maint Part In this table are stored all the maintenance parts. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.g. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. If the document is not saved. C Order). • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.2 MA Maint Operation Stores the maintenance operations that can be done. • MA Maint Operation ID: Identifies a maintenance operation. the field is empty if you create a new document. • MA Maint Part ID: Identifies a maintenance part. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. 48. You cannot share data between Clients. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. the system will generate a document number for you.

• MA Maint Periodicity ID: Identifies a periodicity defined for a maintenance. 398/461 .48. Here there are all the maintenances done in the application. Available options are morning and swing shift • Initdate: Initial date. • MA Maintenance ID: Identifies a maintenance of a machine or machine type. • MA Maintenance ID: Identifies a maintenance of a machine or machine type. You cannot share data between Clients. • Excludeweekend: Exclude weekends from the calculation results. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MA Maint Scheduled ID: Identifies a scheduled maintenance. • MA Maint Part ID: Identifies a maintenance part. those generated by the maintenance periodicity or manually inserted. 48. • Periodicity Type: Sets the correspondent periodicity type.4 MA Maint Periodicity Periodicities of the maintenances defined for machines and machine types. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Weekday: Day of the week • Monthday: Day of the month • Shift: Indicates the shift when the group is going to be measured.5 MA Maint Scheduled Scheduled maintenances.

• Confirmed: Indicates that the maintenance schedule has been confirmed. • MA Maint Worker ID: Identifies a worker that takes part on a maintenance part.• MA Machine ID: Indicates a machine of the enterprise. • MA Maint Operation ID: Identifies a maintenance operation. • MA Machine Type ID: Identifies a machine type. • Maintenance Type: Sets the maintenance type. • Observation: Observations occurred during the process or operation. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Scheduleddate: Scheduled date. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 399/461 . available options are corrective. corrective (urgent) and preventive. You cannot share data between Clients. Available options are morning and swing shift • Result: The Result indicates the result of any action taken on this request. • M Internal Consumption ID: Identifies an internal consumption of products. • Usedtime: Used time in hours. 48.6 MA Maint Worker Workers that take part in the scheduled maintenances. • Shift: Indicates the shift when the group is going to be measured.

• MA Maint Part ID: Identifies a maintenance part. • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. Employee or Salesperson 400/461 . Customer. This can include Vendor.

You cannot share data between Clients.g. • MA Machine Cost ID: 401/461 . 49. • Usecycle: Indicates the number of years that it’s useful • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. If you leave the search key empty. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.49 Manufacturing: Machine In machine and machine type all machines of the application are defined with the correspondent costs and maintenance schedules. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. Work Station defines the work stations and the processes. 49. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. C Order). machines and toolset types that forms part of it. Not implemented yet • MA Machine Type ID: Identifies a machine type. the system automatically creates a numeric number. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MA Costcenter ID: Identifies a cost center. • MA Machine ID: Indicates a machine of the enterprise. • Purchaseyear: Indicates the purchase year.1 MA Machine In this tab is defined each machine of the enterprise.2 MA Machine Cost Machine costing information during time periods.

402/461 Figure 49: Manufacturing: Machine .

• Cost: Cost amount. • Validfrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range • Costuom: Unit of Measure for cost • Purchaseamt: Purchase amount.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Consume: Not implemented yet • Costuomyear: 49.3 MA Machinestation In this table are assigned to each station the correspondent machines. • Toolsetamt: Total amount of the toolsets. • MA Machinestation ID: Machine Station 403/461 . • Amortization: Amortization amount. You cannot share data between Clients. • Dayhours: Working hours per day • Improductivehoursyear: Total no productive hours per year. • MA Machine ID: Indicates a machine of the enterprise. • Yearvalue: • Daysyear: Working days per year.

404/461 . 49.4 MA Machine Type In this table are stored the used machine types to group similar machines.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • MA Machine Type ID: Identifies a machine type. You cannot share data between Clients. • MA Machine ID: Indicates a machine of the enterprise. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • MA Workstation ID: Indicates a Work Station of the enterprise. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. 405/461 . the system automatically creates a numeric number. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • MA Indirect Cost ID: Indicates an indirect cost. You cannot share data between Clients.1 MA Costcenter IC Indirect costs associated to each cost center. • MA Costcenter Ic ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. If you leave the search key empty. • Cost: Cost amount.g. 50. • MA Costcenter Version ID: Identifies a cost center version valid during a time period. You cannot share data between Clients. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.50 Manufacturing: Cost Center In cost center is defined the cost centers of the enterprise with the machines. C Order).2 MA CostCenter In this table is configured each cost center. • MA Costcenter ID: Identifies a cost center. salary categories and indirect costs. Not implemented yet • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. 50.

406/461 Figure 50: Manufacturing: Cost Center .

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.4 MA CostCenter Machine Machines associated to a cost center. • MA Costcenter Version ID: Identifies a cost center version valid during a time period. 407/461 . • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. when not from the work effort header. • MA Costcenter Employee ID: Identifies a salary category of a cost center. When is by default the data is taken from the work requirement phase. • Costuom: Unit of Measure for cost 50. • MA Costcenter Version ID: Identifies a cost center version valid during a time period. • MA Costcenter Machine ID: Identifies a machine associated to a cost center. • Calculated: Indicates that the record has been calculated. • Costuom: Unit of Measure for cost Not implemented yet 50.• Bydefault: When calculated is checked determines how is calculated the cost center use. You cannot share data between Clients.3 MA Costcenter Employee Salary categories and employee number of each category of the cost center. • C Salary Category ID: Indicates a salary category • Quantity: Indicates the quantity of product needed to process one time the sequence. You cannot share data between Clients.

g. • MA Costcenter Version ID: Identifies a cost center version valid during a time period. • Use: Indicates the use coefficient. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. • MA Costcenter ID: Identifies a cost center. • Cost: Cost amount. You cannot share data between Clients.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. 50. • Costuom: Unit of Measure for cost • Validfrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range 408/461 . C Order). The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. If you leave the field empty.• MA Machine ID: Indicates a machine of the enterprise. If the document is not saved. the field is empty if you create a new document. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. the system will generate a document number for you.5 MA Costcenter Version Cost center version valid during a time period. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

You cannot share data between Clients. production in each product and structure only to final product that is sold. • Cost Type: The cost type defines when the cost is added to the product. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Datefrom: The Date From indicates the starting date of a range. 51. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • MA Indirect Cost ID: Indicates an indirect cost.1 MA Indirect Cost Indirect costs of a product. You cannot share data between Clients. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.2 MA Indirect Cost Value Cost values of the indirect cost during a time period • MA Indirect Cost Value ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MA Indirect Cost ID: Indicates an indirect cost. 51. • Dateto: The Date To indicates the end date of a range (inclusive) 409/461 . • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.51 Manufacturing: Indirect Cost Indirect costs are costs added to the manufacturing costs.

410/461 Figure 51: Manufacturing: Indirect Cost .

• Total: Total amount • Cost: Cost amount. • Cost Uom: Unit of Measure for cost • Calculated: Indicates that the record has been calculated. 411/461 . • Calculate: Process to calculate the cost when the total amount is given.

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.52 Manufacturing: Incidence The incidences are used in the work effort to store the work incidences. • Strtime: Start time in hours. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 412/461 . • MA Incidence ID: Unique identifier for incidence • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.1 MA Incidence The Work incidence table is used to describe incidences. 52. You cannot share data between Clients.

413/461 Figure 52: Manufacturing: Incidence .

You cannot share data between Clients. If you leave the search key empty. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.g. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MA Workstation ID: Indicates a Work Station of the enterprise.1 MA Process In this table are described the diferent process that are done in the work station. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. the system automatically creates a numeric number. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record.53 Manufacturing: Work Station In Section are introduced the diferent sections of manufacturing that exists in the enterprise. With the stations there are indicated the diferent machines that compose it. • MA Process ID: Indicates a manufacturing process of the enterprise. • MA Cc Idprep: Not implemented yet • MA Cc Idwork: Not implemented yet • MA Costcenter ID: Identifies a cost center. C Order). • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. In Work stations are introduced the diferent work stations. the processes that are done in the station and the toolsets used in each process. 414/461 . 53. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName.

415/461 Figure 53: Manufacturing: Work Station .

The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. If you leave the search key empty. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • MA Section ID: Indicates a section of the enterprise. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName.3 MA Workstation In this table it’s defined the work station. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. You cannot share data between Clients. • MA Section ID: Indicates a section of the enterprise. the system automatically creates a numeric number. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.g. It’s indicated to which section belongs and the GFHs of preparations and work. 53. • MA Workstation ID: Indicates a Work Station of the enterprise. 416/461 .53. You cannot share data between Clients. C Order). where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record.2 MA Section In section table it’s defined each section. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.

54. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.4 C Salary Category Cost Costs of a salary categories. 54. 417/461 . • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. 54.1 C Salary Category Salary categories for employees. • C Salary Category ID: Indicates a salary category 54.5 C Salary Category Salary categories for employees. 54.54 Salary Category Salary categories are the different cost ranges of the employees.3 C Salary Category Salary categories for employees. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.2 C Salary Category Cost Costs of a salary categories. • C Salary Category Cost ID: Identifies a cost of a salary category during a time period. You cannot share data between Clients.

418/461 Figure 54: Salary Category .

54.6 C Salary Category Cost Costs of a salary categories. • Datefrom: The Date From indicates the starting date of a range. • C Salary Category ID: Indicates a salary category 54. • Cost: Cost amount. Costs of a salary categories.10 C Salary Category C Salary Category Cost Salary categories for employees. • Costuom: Unit of Measure for cost 419/461 . 54. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.54.7 C Salary Category Salary categories for employees.9 54.8 C Salary Category Cost Costs of a salary categories.

• Datedoc: The Document Date indicates the date the document was generated. You cannot share data between Clients. You cannot share data between Clients. Customer. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. 420/461 . It may or may not be the same as the accounting date. • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. 55. Purchase planifications plans the necessaries purchase orders. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Sales forecast are the expected sales for a time period. • MRP Salesforecastline ID: Identifies an expected sale line. Employee or Salesperson • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • MRP Salesforecast ID: Identifier of an expected sales header.2 MRP SalesForecastLine In this table are stored the expected sale lines. 55.1 MRP SalesForecast In this table are stored the expected sales. • MRP Salesforecast ID: Identifier of an expected sales header. This can include Vendor. Planning method defines the different data that is taking into account in the planifications. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.55 MRP Manufacturing planification plans the work requirements necessaries for the expected material requirements.

421/461 Figure 55: MRP .

You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 55. You cannot share data between Clients. 55. 422/461 . • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Ispurchase: Sets the record id for purchase. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.• Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document.4 MRP PlanningMethod The planning method sets the inputs that are taken into account for the planning processes. • Dateplanned: Expected date of the transaction. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.3 MRP Planner Planner of the MRP • MRP Planner ID: Identifies a planner of the MRP. • MRP Planningmethod ID: Identifies a method for filtering the input for planning processes. • Isproduction: Sets the record id for production. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

• Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. • Inouttrxtype: Transaction types available for the MRP. • Daysfrom: Number of days from the main date to the begining of the period. 423/461 . • MRP Planningmethodline ID: Identifies a filter option for the input types of the planning methods.6 MRP Run Production Headers of the production planning processes. You cannot share data between Clients.• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. in so much per one. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.5 MRP PlanningMethodLine The planning method line sets the filter options for the input types of the planning methods. You cannot share data between Clients. • Daysto: Number of days from the main date to the end of the period. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. 55. 55. • MRP Planningmethod ID: Identifies a method for filtering the input for planning processes. • Weighting: Percentage of the transaction that is used. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MRP Run Production ID: Headers of the production planning processes.

Customer. • Launchwr: Process to generate work requirements. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. Employee or Salesperson • Timehorizon: Time horizon in number of days for the planning process. It may or may not be the same as the accounting date. • Securitymargin: Margin in days between the different transactions.• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. This can include Vendor. 424/461 . • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. Product categories are used for pricing. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Recalculatestock: Process to recalculate the product quantities of the lines. • C Bp Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners. • Datedoc: The Document Date indicates the date the document was generated. • Simulate: Process to run the production planning process. • MRP Planner ID: Identifies a planner of the MRP. • Launchmr: Process to generate material requirements. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.

55. • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Requisitionline ID: Identifies each product required to purchase in a requisition • MA Processplan ID: Indicates a process plan.7 MRP Run ProductionLine Lines of the production planning processes. • Isfixed: Is fixed • C Orderline ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order. • MRP Run Production ID: Headers of the production planning processes. • Parent ID: The Parent indicates the value used to represent a summary level or report to level for a record • Inouttrxtype: Transaction types available for the MRP. 425/461 . • MRP Run Productionline ID: Identifies a line of the production planning processes. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MRP Salesforecastline ID: Identifies an expected sale line. • Neededqty: Quantity needed • Planneddate: Planned date of the transaction. • MA Workrequirement ID: Indicates a work requirement.

You cannot share data between Clients. 55. • Cumqty: Cumulate quantity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • MRP Run Purchase ID: Identifies a header of the purchase planning processes.• Isexploded: The line has been exploded. • Vendor ID: Identifies a business partner that is a vendor. • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to.8 MRP Run Purchase Headers of the purchase planning processes. It may or may not be the same as the accounting date. • MRP Planner ID: Identifies a planner of the MRP. • Recalculatestock: Process to recalculate the product quantities of the lines. • Plannedorderdate: Planned date to order the transaction. • Datedoc: The Document Date indicates the date the document was generated. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Product categories are used for pricing. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Isplanned: Is planned. 426/461 . • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.

• Launchpo: Process to generate purchase orders. • Securitymargin: Margin in days between the different transactions. • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • Recalculatestock: Process to recalculate the product quantities of the lines. • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. Employee or Salesperson • Timehorizon: Time horizon in number of days for the planning process. Customer. 427/461 .9 MRP Run PurchaseLine Lines of the purchase planning processes.• C Bp Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners. • Simulate: Process to run the production planning process. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • MRP Run Purchaseline ID: Identifies a line of the purchase planning processes. • MRP Run Purchase ID: Identifies a header of the purchase planning processes. This can include Vendor. 55. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • Neededqty: Quantity needed • Planneddate: Planned date of the transaction.

Customer.• Inouttrxtype: Transaction types available for the MRP. This can include Vendor. • MRP Salesforecastline ID: Identifies an expected sale line. • Isfixed: Is fixed • C Orderline ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order. • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • M Requisitionline ID: Identifies each product required to purchase in a requisition • Iscompleted: Line completed • Plannedorderdate: Planned date to order the transaction. • MA Workrequirement ID: Indicates a work requirement. Employee or Salesperson • Cumqty: Cumulate quantity. 428/461 .

The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients. 429/461 . Warehouse and Locators defines each Warehouse. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. vendors and employees.56 Warehouse services Business Partner allows you do define any party with whom you transact. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. These schedules are used to invoice rented locators • M WH Schedule ID: The warehouse schedule ID identifies a unique schedule for renting locators. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 56. • Sizemultiplier: 56. This includes customers. any Locators for that Warehouse and the Accounting parameters to be used for inventory in that Warehouse.1 M Locator Type Contains all the differents types for a locator • M Locator Type ID: The ID identifies the unique type for the locator • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.2 M WH Schedule Contains all the differents schedules for a warehouse.

430/461 Figure 56: Warehouse services .

• M WH Schedule ID: The warehouse schedule ID identifies a unique schedule for renting locators. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.g: every two weeks. (E. • M WH Schedule ID: The warehouse schedule ID identifies a unique schedule for renting locators. 431/461 . monthly) • Generateperiods: A button that generates periods depending on two dates • Activateperiods: 56. • Invoicingtype: How to invoice a locator is being renting 56.3 M WH Schedule Product Contains all the differents product that will be used in the invoices • M WH Schedule Product ID: The ID idenitfies a unique product for the warehouse shedule • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • StartDate: The Start Date indicates the first or starting date of a range. You cannot share data between Clients. You cannot share data between Clients.4 M WH Period Contains all the periods for the schedule • M WH Period ID: The ID identifies a unique period for the warehouse schedule • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.• Periodicity: Regular intervals.

Customer.6 M InOutLine Type Contains all the periods for a warehouse • M Inoutline Type ID: The ID identifies a unique record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.5 M WH Period Invoiced Contains all the invoices generated due based on the rented locators for that period • M WH Period Invoiced ID: The ID identifies a unique period invoiced for the the period • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 56.• EndDate: The End Date indicates the last date in this range. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Invoicingmode: Invoicing Mode 432/461 . This can include Vendor. • M WH Period ID: The ID identifies a unique period for the warehouse schedule • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. You cannot share data between Clients. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. Employee or Salesperson • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. 56.

• IN Product ID: Identifies a service due to material receipts • OUT Product ID: Identifies a service due to shipments out 433/461 .

where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • C Doctype ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules 434/461 . The Product Category allows you to define different groups of products. Product defines all products used by an organization.1 C ExternalPOS External Point of Sales • C Externalpos ID: External Point of Sales • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. etc. • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. defining margins and for easily assigning different accounting parameters for products. These products include those sold to customers.57 External POS External Point of Sales defines the different used POS and the products that can sale. C Order).g. These groups can be used in generating Price Lists. Update Name. the system automatically creates a numeric number. Maintain your Resources. used in the manufacture of products sold to customers and products purchased by an organization. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. in the Resource and don’t change it in the product. 57. Unit of Measure. If you leave the search key empty. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. The product for the resource is automatically created and synchronized.

435/461 Figure 57: External POS .

Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user.• C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • Include Product Category: If it is checked the selected categories will be included else they will be excluded. 436/461 . 57. Employee or Salesperson • M Pricelist ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing. • Salesrep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region. • C Externalpos ID: External Point of Sales • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. • M Shipper ID: The Shipper is any entity which will provide shipping to or shipping from an Organization. Customer. You cannot share data between Clients. This can include Vendor. • Include Product: If it is checked the selected products will be included else they will be excluded. margin and cost of items purchased or sold.2 C ExternalPOS Category Product Categories • C Externalpos Category ID: The ID identifies a unique record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Product categories are used for pricing.

The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. 437/461 . • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. C Order).4 M Product Defines each product and identifies it for use in price lists and orders. You cannot share data between Clients. the system automatically creates a numeric number. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. You cannot share data between Clients. 57.57. If you leave the search key empty. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. The Location is the default location when receiving the stored products.3 C ExternalPOS Product Products • C Externalpos Product ID: The ID identifies a unique record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Externalpos ID: External Point of Sales • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. comment or help about the use of this item. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • DocumentNote: The Document Note is used for recording any additional information regarding this product.g.

ITF. Code 93. UPC (E). • IsPurchased: The Purchased check box indicates if this product is purchased by this organization. ISSN. Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user. Code 25. Code 128.• UPC: Use this field to enter the bar code for the product in any of the bar code symbologies (Codabar. POSTNET and FIM. This is used for products that consist of a bill of materials 438/461 . • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • SalesRep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region. Code 39. • IsStocked: The Stocked check box indicates if this product is stocked by this Organization. • IsSold: The Sold check box indicates if this product is sold by this organization. JAN-13. ITF-14. ISBN. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. EAN-13. • IsInvoicePrintDetails: The Print Details on Invoice indicates that the BOM element products will print on the Invoice as opposed to this product. • IsPickListPrintDetails: The Print Details on Pick List indicates that the BOM element products will print on the Pick List as opposed to this product. UPC (A). and Pharmacode) • SKU: The SKU indicates a user defined stock keeping unit. • IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. It may be used for an additional bar code symbols or your own schema. • IsBOM: The Bill of Materials check box indicates if this product consists of a bill of materials. EAN-8. • IsVerified: The Verified check box indicates if the configuration of this product has been verified. JAN-8. MSI/Plessey.

• Classification: The Classification can be used to optionally group products. • Volume: The Volume indicates the volume of the product in the Volume UOM of the Client • Weight: The Weight indicates the weight of the product in the Weight UOM of the Client • ShelfWidth: The Shelf Width indicates the width dimension required on a shelf for a product • ShelfHeight: The Shelf Height indicates the height dimension required on a shelf for a product • ShelfDepth: The Shelf Depth indicates the depth dimension required on a shelf for a product • UnitsPerPallet: The Units per Pallet indicates the number of units of this product which fit on a pallet. • S Resource ID: The ID identifies a unique resource Not implemented yet • Discontinued: The Discontinued check box indicates a product that has been discontinued. For example. Sales Tax or Value Added Tax. • DiscontinuedBy: The Discontinued By indicates the individual who discontinued this product 439/461 . • C TaxCategory ID: The Tax Category provides a method of grouping similar taxes. Product categories are used for pricing.• C RevenueRecognition ID: The Revenue Recognition indicates how revenue will be recognized for this product • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to.

Employee or Salesperson 440/461 . This can include Vendor. but retrieved at runtime. • S ExpenseType ID: Expense report type • ProductType: The type of product also determines accounting consequences. there is no limit to the availability or guarantee. • VersionNo: Version Number Not implemented yet • M AttributeSet ID: Define Product Attribute Sets to add additional attributes and values to the product. The image can be a gif.• Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. jpeg or png. • R MailText ID: The Mail Template indicates the mail template for return messages. • ImageURL: URL of image. • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • DownloadURL: Semicolon separated list of URLs to be downloaded or distributed • M FreightCategory ID: Freight Categories are used to calculate the Freight for the Shipper selected • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. • AD Image ID: Defines a system image • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. Customer. • DescriptionURL: URL for the description • GuaranteeDays: If the value is 0. The image is not stored in the database. You need to define a Attribute Set if you want to enable Serial and Lot Number tracking. otherwise the guarantee date is calculated by adding the days to the delivery date.

Deprecated • Greenpoint Uom: Custom code. Deprecated • Upc2: Custom code.• Ispriceprinted: It allows you to print or not the price of a product in a document so you can summary many products in just one. • MA Processplan ID: Indicates a process plan. • MA Producttype ID: • Production: A product that is used for production plans 441/461 . Deprecated • Calculated: Indicates that the record has been calculated. • Name2: Additional Name • Costtype: Different types of cost • Coststd: The value of the standard cost • Stock Min: Minimum stock of a product Not implemented yet • Enforce Attribute: For differing the stock of a product by the attribute Not implemented yet • Bundle Uom: Custom code.

• AD ImpFormat ID: The ID identifies a unique import format • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • FormatType: The Format is a drop down list box for selecting the format type (text. Selecting the ’Process’ button will either add or modify the appropriate records. 442/461 . The Import Natural Account is an interim table which is used when importing external data into the system. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Selecting the ’Process’ button will either add or modify the appropriate records. • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. tab delimited. The Import Products is an interim table which is used when importing external data into the system.58 Import data Allows the bank statement import configuration and its execution The Import Business Partner is an interim table which is used when importing external data into the system. Selecting the ’Process’ button will either add or modify the appropriate records. You cannot share data between Clients. The Import Loader Format is used for defining the file layout for product information which will be imported. XML. 58. etc) of the file to be imported • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.1 AD ImpFormat The Import Format tab contains each record parameter configuration for each data import type. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

443/461 Figure 58: Import data .

3rd: Underscore. You cannot share data between Clients. It must be in Java Notation • DecimalPoint: Decimal Point in the data file • DivideBy100: Divide number by 100 to get correct amount • ConstantValue: Constant value • Callout: Function Calls separated by semicolons. Please note that you have to make sure that a Constant has the correct SQL data type (i.e. 2nd: Enter/Leave. . you need to enclose it like ’this’) • AD ImpFormat Row ID: The ID identifies a unique format field • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Column ID: Link to the database column of the table • StartNo: The Start Number indicates the starting position in the line or field number in the line • EndNo: • DataType: • DataFormat: The Date Format indicates how dates are defined on the record to be imported. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.58. • AD ImpFormat ID: The ID identifies a unique import format • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.1st: System/User.then Function Name 444/461 .2 AD ImpFormat Row Define the individual field based on the table definition. SE /SL /UE /UL . if it is a ’string’.

com/dunsno/list. C Order).For details see www. • Name2: Additional Name • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.3 I BPartner The import business partner is an interin table which is used when importing external data into the system • I BPartner ID: The ID identifies a unique business partner to import • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. This can include Vendor.• Script: Use Java language constructs to define the result of the calculation 58. the system automatically creates a numeric number.dnb. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • NAICS: The NAICS/SIC identifies either of these codes that may be applicable to this Business Partner. Employee or Salesperson • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. This value is the short name for the group. If before inserting it doesn’t exists in the table C BP Group. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. it won’t work 445/461 . If you leave the search key empty. You cannot share data between Clients.htm • TaxID: The Tax ID field identifies the legal Identification number of this Entity. • DUNS: Used for EDI . • GroupValue: The value of the business partner group. Customer.g.

• City: The City identifies a unique City for this Country or Region.htm • Title: The Title indicates the name that an entity is referred to as. if appropriate. • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • Address1: The Address 1 identifies the address for an entity’s location • Address2: The Address 2 provides additional address information for an entity. any additional Postal Code information. • RegionName: The Region Name defines the name that will print when this region is used in a document. • Postal Add: The Additional ZIP or Postal Code identifies.http://www. • C Region ID: The Region identifies a unique Region for this Country. • ContactName: Business Partner Contact Name • ContactDescription: Description of Contact • Comments: The Comments field allows for free form entry of additional information.org/trade/rec/rec03en. apartment number or similar information.de/gremien/nas/nabd/iso3166ma/codlstp1. It can be used for building location.unece. Each Country must be defined before it can be used in any document.din. • CountryCode: For details . 446/461 . • Postal: The Postal Code field identifies the postal code for this entity’s address.• C BP Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners.html or .http://www. • C Country ID: The Country defines a Country.

• Phone: The Phone field identifies a telephone number • Phone2: The 2nd Phone field identifies an alternate telephone number. Openbravo checks the Unit of Measure (default if not set).com).smith@company. • Fax: The Fax identifies a facsimile number for this Business Partner or Location • Email: The Email Address is the Electronic Mail ID for this User and should be fully qualified (e. Passwords are required to identify authorized users. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed.g. • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. • I IsImported: The Imported check box indicates if this import has been processed. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • I ErrorMsg: The Import Error Message displays any error messages generated during the import process. the Business Partner. the Product Category (default if not set). the uniquen 447/461 . • Password: The Password indicates the Password for this User Id. the Currency (defaults to accounting currency if not set). • Birthday: Birthday or Anniversary day • C Greeting ID: The Greeting identifies the greeting to print on correspondence. joe. • BPContactGreeting: Greeting for Business Partner Contact • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record.4 I Product Before importing. 58. the Product Type (only Items and Services).

EAN-8. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. It may be used for an additional bar code symbols or your own schema. C Order). The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. comment or help about the use of this item. • X12DE355: The Unit of Measure Code indicates the EDI X12 Code Data Element 355 (Unit or Basis for Measurement) • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure 448/461 . JAN-8. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.g. Code 93. UPC (E). the system automatically creates a numeric number. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. You cannot share data between Clients. POSTNET and FIM. and Pharmacode) • SKU: The SKU indicates a user defined stock keeping unit. Code 25. EAN-13. Code 128. • DocumentNote: The Document Note is used for recording any additional information regarding this product. Code 39.• I Product ID: The ID identifies a unique product • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. JAN-13. UPC (A). MSI/Plessey. ITF. ISBN. If you leave the search key empty. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. ISSN. • UPC: Use this field to enter the bar code for the product in any of the bar code symbologies (Codabar. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. ITF-14.

it won’t work • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. but retrieved at runtime. • Classification: The Classification can be used to optionally group products. • ProductType: The type of product also determines accounting consequences. • Discontinued: The Discontinued check box indicates a product that has been discontinued. The image is not stored in the database. • Volume: The Volume indicates the volume of the product in the Volume UOM of the Client • Weight: The Weight indicates the weight of the product in the Weight UOM of the Client • ShelfWidth: The Shelf Width indicates the width dimension required on a shelf for a product • ShelfHeight: The Shelf Height indicates the height dimension required on a shelf for a product • ShelfDepth: The Shelf Depth indicates the depth dimension required on a shelf for a product • UnitsPerPallet: The Units per Pallet indicates the number of units of this product which fit on a pallet. Product categories are used for pricing. 449/461 . This value is the short name for the group. The image can be a gif.• ProductCategory Value: The value of the product category. jpeg or png. If before inserting it doesn’t exists in the table M Product Category Id. • DiscontinuedBy: The Discontinued By indicates the individual who discontinued this product • ImageURL: URL of image.

This can include Vendor. • VendorProductNo: The Vendor Product Number identifies the number used by the vendor for this product. • Manufacturer: Manufacturer • Order Min: The Minimum Order Quantity indicates the smallest quantity of this product which can be ordered. 450/461 . Employee or Salesperson • ISO Code: For details . This allows you to enter future prices for products which will become effective when appropriate. • RoyaltyAmt: • PriceEffective: The Price Effective indicates the date this price is for. Customer.htm • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • PriceList: The List Price is the official List Price in the document currency. • Order Pack: The Order Pack Quantity indicates the number of units in each pack of this product. • VendorCategory: The Vendor Category identifies the category used by the vendor for this product.org/trade/rec/rec09en. This value goes rigth to the field Search key on the window Business partner • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.unece.• DescriptionURL: URL for the description • BPartner Value: The value or short name for the business partner.http://www. • PricePO: The PO Price indicates the price for a product per the purchase order.

• Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. You cannot share data between Clients. • DeliveryTime Promised: The Promised Delivery Time indicates the number of days between the order date and the date that delivery was promised. If you leave the search key empty.5 I ElementValue This process imports the accounting accounts tree into the organization • I ElementValue ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. 451/461 . C Order).g. • ElementName: • C ElementValue ID: Account Elements can be natural accounts or user defined values.• CostPerOrder: The Cost Per Order indicates the fixed charge levied when an order for this product is placed. • C Element ID: The Account Element uniquely identifies an Account Type. 58. the system automatically creates a numeric number. These are commonly known as a Chart of Accounts. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • I ErrorMsg: The Import Error Message displays any error messages generated during the import process. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. • I IsImported: The Imported check box indicates if this import has been processed.

L . The account type is used to determine what taxes. • ParentValue: • ParentElementValue ID: • PostActual: The Post Actual indicates if actual values can be posted to this element value. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.Liability. • AccountType: Valid account types are A .Asset.Owner Equity. • PostBudget: The Post Budget indicates if budget values can be posted to this element value. validating payables and receivables for business partners. R -Revenue and M. E .Memo. • PostStatistical: • PostEncumbrance: • Default Account: • AD Column ID: Link to the database column of the table 452/461 . Note: Memo account amounts are ignored when checking for balancing • AccountSign: Indicates if the expected balance for this account should be a Debit or a Credit. O. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values.• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.Expense. if any are applicable. • IsDocControlled: • IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node.

• Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. The Document Type is on purpose not fully derived as it has too many consequences if it’s wrong. The best way is to set the Document Type Name as a Constant in your Import File Format or as an imported fi • I Order ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • I IsImported: The Imported check box indicates if this import has been processed. with centralized services. • I ErrorMsg: The Import Error Message displays any error messages generated during the import process. You cannot share data between Clients. • I ErrorMsg: The Import Error Message displays any error messages generated during the import process. • I IsImported: The Imported check box indicates if this import has been processed. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • SalesRep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region. 58.6 I Order You should supply the Document Type Name (or ID). 453/461 . Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user. • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). and inter-organization transactions. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record.

• C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • BillTo ID: The Bill/Invoice To indicates the address to use when remitting bills • C Location ID: The Location / Address field defines the location of an entity. • IsSOTrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. It can be used for building location. 454/461 .• M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. apartment number or similar information. Customer. • Postal: The Postal Code field identifies the postal code for this entity’s address. • M PriceList ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing. Employee or Salesperson • BPartnerValue: • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • M Shipper ID: The Shipper is any entity which will provide shipping to or shipping from an Organization. margin and cost of items purchased or sold. • Address1: The Address 1 identifies the address for an entity’s location • Address2: The Address 2 provides additional address information for an entity. This can include Vendor. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.

html or .unece. joe.din.http://www.com). • C Country ID: The Country defines a Country. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • ContactName: Business Partner Contact Name • Email: The Email Address is the Electronic Mail ID for this User and should be fully qualified (e. • RegionName: The Region Name defines the name that will print when this region is used in a document.smith@company. Each Country must be defined before it can be used in any document. • C Region ID: The Region identifies a unique Region for this Country.g. • CountryCode: For details .http://www.org/trade/rec/rec03en.de/gremien/nas/nabd/iso3166ma/codlstp1. 455/461 .• City: The City identifies a unique City for this Country or Region. • Phone: The Phone field identifies a telephone number • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • C DocType ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules • DocTypeName: • C PaymentTerm ID: Payment Terms identify the method and timing of payment for this transaction.htm • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system.

• TaxIndicator: The Tax Indicator identifies the short name that will print on documents referencing this tax. Code 128. JAN-8. • C OrderLine ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line. ITF. ITF-14. Code 39. 456/461 .g. • ProductValue: • UPC: Use this field to enter the bar code for the product in any of the bar code symbologies (Codabar. EAN-13. EAN-8. ISSN. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. Code 93. UPC (A). • TaxAmt: The Tax Amount displays the total tax amount for a document. UPC (E). JAN-13. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. the field is empty if you create a new document. C Order). the system will generate a document number for you. Code 25. It may be used for an additional bar code symbols or your own schema. If you leave the field empty. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. MSI/Plessey.• PaymentTermValue: Key of the Payment Term • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. POSTNET and FIM. If the document is not saved. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. and Pharmacode) • SKU: The SKU indicates a user defined stock keeping unit. ISBN. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿.

that an Order was promised for. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. • Datepromised: The Date Promised indicates the date. • Order Referenceno: • Vendor Upc: 457/461 .• LineDescription: • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • QtyOrdered: The Ordered Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that was ordered. • FreightAmt: The Freight Amount indicates the amount charged for Freight in the document currency. if any. • Billto Upc: • Bpartnerupc: • C Bpartner Location Upc: • Dateordered: Indicates the Date an item was ordered. • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. • PriceActual: The Actual or Unit Price indicates the Price for a product in source currency.

Customer. You cannot share data between Clients. This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier 458/461 . • Validcombinationident: The identifier for the account combination. Employee or Salesperson • Partnerident: The identifier for the Partner.58. This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This can include Vendor. This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier • C Period ID: The Period indicates an exclusive range of dates for a calendar.7 I Budgetline Is an interin table which is used when external data into the system • I Budgetline ID: The ID identifies a unique record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Periodident: The identifier for the Period. • Productident: The identifier for the Product. • C Budgetline ID: The ID identifies a unique record • C Validcombination ID: The Combination identifies a valid combination of element which represent a GL account. This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • C Uom ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.

459/461 . This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • Projectident: The identifier for the Project. This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. and inter-organization transactions. • Campaignident: The identifier for the Campaign. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign.• AD Orgtrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). • Orgtrxident: The identifier for the Organization. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier • C Salesregion ID: The Sales Region indicates a specific area of sales coverage. with centralized services. This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • Activityident: • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Seqno: The Sequence indicates the order of records • C Bp Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners. • Salesregionident: The identifier for the Sales region.

This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • Prodcategoryident: The identifier for the product category. • Currencyident: The identifier for the Currency. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier 460/461 . • I Isimported: The Imported check box indicates if this import has been processed. Product categories are used for pricing. • Price: The Price indicates the Price for a product or service. • I Errormsg: The Import Error Message displays any error messages generated during the import process.• Bpgroupident: The identifier for the business partner group. • Amount: The Amount indicates the amount for this document line. This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier • C Budget ID: Used to define the anticipated costs of doing business • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document.

To view a copy of this license.org/licenses/by-sa/2. visibly on all its pages. California 94305. USA. any redistribution of this work or any derivative work must maintain this copyright notice and.L. visit http://creativecommons. 559 Nathan Abbott Way. Stanford.5 Spain License.5/ es/ or send a letter to Creative Commons.openbravo.com/docs/ 461/461 . The most updated copy of this work may be obtained at http://www. 2007 This work is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 2. As attribution to the original author.c Openbravo S. the Openbravo logo.

You're Reading a Free Preview

Download
scribd
/*********** DO NOT ALTER ANYTHING BELOW THIS LINE ! ************/ var s_code=s.t();if(s_code)document.write(s_code)//-->